WO2007149512A2 - Peptide epoxyketones for pr0teas0me inhibition - Google Patents

Peptide epoxyketones for pr0teas0me inhibition Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007149512A2
WO2007149512A2 PCT/US2007/014427 US2007014427W WO2007149512A2 WO 2007149512 A2 WO2007149512 A2 WO 2007149512A2 US 2007014427 W US2007014427 W US 2007014427W WO 2007149512 A2 WO2007149512 A2 WO 2007149512A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
compound
hydrogen
mmol
zaz
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2007/014427
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2007149512A3 (en
Inventor
Kevin D. Shenk
Francesco Parlati
Han-Jie Zhou
Catherine Sylvain
Mark S. Smyth
Mark K. Bennett
Guy J. Laidig
Original Assignee
Proteolix, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to CA2657213A priority Critical patent/CA2657213C/en
Priority to NZ573759A priority patent/NZ573759A/en
Application filed by Proteolix, Inc. filed Critical Proteolix, Inc.
Priority to EP07809745.8A priority patent/EP2041158B1/en
Priority to UAA200814605A priority patent/UA101303C2/en
Priority to KR1020097000551A priority patent/KR101441703B1/en
Priority to JP2009516564A priority patent/JP5226679B2/en
Priority to CN200780030610.4A priority patent/CN101506224B/en
Priority to ES07809745T priority patent/ES2415632T3/en
Priority to AU2007261345A priority patent/AU2007261345B2/en
Priority to MX2008016512A priority patent/MX2008016512A/en
Priority to BRPI0713309-0A priority patent/BRPI0713309A2/en
Priority to DK07809745.8T priority patent/DK2041158T3/en
Priority to PL07809745T priority patent/PL2041158T3/en
Priority to SI200731257T priority patent/SI2041158T1/en
Publication of WO2007149512A2 publication Critical patent/WO2007149512A2/en
Publication of WO2007149512A3 publication Critical patent/WO2007149512A3/en
Priority to IL196064A priority patent/IL196064A/en
Priority to HK09108367.9A priority patent/HK1128702A1/en
Priority to IL218033A priority patent/IL218033A/en
Priority to PH12012501747A priority patent/PH12012501747A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/10—Tetrapeptides
    • C07K5/1002—Tetrapeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/1016—Tetrapeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aromatic or cycloaliphatic
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/336—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having three-membered rings, e.g. oxirane, fumagillin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/18—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for pancreatic disorders, e.g. pancreatic enzymes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/08—Bronchodilators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/14—Drugs for dermatological disorders for baldness or alopecia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/12—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for electrolyte homeostasis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A61P33/02—Antiprotozoals, e.g. for leishmaniasis, trichomoniasis, toxoplasmosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D303/00—Compounds containing three-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D303/02—Compounds containing oxirane rings
    • C07D303/12—Compounds containing oxirane rings with hydrocarbon radicals, substituted by singly or doubly bound oxygen atoms
    • C07D303/32—Compounds containing oxirane rings with hydrocarbon radicals, substituted by singly or doubly bound oxygen atoms by aldehydo- or ketonic radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/06026—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 0 or 1 carbon atom, i.e. Gly or Ala
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/06034—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 2 to 4 carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/06034—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 2 to 4 carbon atoms
    • C07K5/06043—Leu-amino acid
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/06034—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 2 to 4 carbon atoms
    • C07K5/06052—Val-amino acid
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/0606—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing heteroatoms not provided for by C07K5/06086 - C07K5/06139, e.g. Ser, Met, Cys, Thr
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06078—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aromatic or cycloaliphatic
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06086—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being basic
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06086—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being basic
    • C07K5/06095—Arg-amino acid
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06—Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06104—Dipeptides with the first amino acid being acidic
    • C07K5/06113—Asp- or Asn-amino acid
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/0804—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/0806—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 0 or 1 carbon atoms, i.e. Gly, Ala
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/0804—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/0808—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 2 to 4 carbon atoms, e.g. Val, Ile, Leu
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/0812—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aromatic or cycloaliphatic
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0819—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being acidic
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0821—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being heterocyclic, e.g. His, Pro, Trp
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/10—Tetrapeptides
    • C07K5/1002—Tetrapeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/1005—Tetrapeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/1008—Tetrapeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 0 or 1 carbon atoms, i.e. Gly, Ala
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A50/00—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE in human health protection, e.g. against extreme weather
    • Y02A50/30—Against vector-borne diseases, e.g. mosquito-borne, fly-borne, tick-borne or waterborne diseases whose impact is exacerbated by climate change

Definitions

  • proteasome-mediated degradation In eukaryotes, protein degradation is predominately mediated through the ubiquitin pathway in which proteins targeted for destruction are ligated to the 76 amino acid polypeptide ubiquitin. Once targeted, ubiquitinated proteins then serve as substrates for the 26S proteasome, a multicatalytic protease, which cleaves proteins into short peptides through the action of its three major proteolytic activities. While having a general function in intracellular protein turnover, proteasome-mediated degradation also plays a key role in many processes such as major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I presentation, apoptosis and cell viability, antigen processing, NF- ⁇ B activation, and transduction of pro-inflammatory signals.
  • MHC major histocompatibility complex
  • the 20S proteasome is a 700 kDa cylindrical-shaped multicatalytic protease complex comprised of 28 subunits, classified as ⁇ - and ⁇ -type, that are arranged in 4 stacked heptameric rings. In yeast and other eukaryotes, 7 different ⁇ subunits form the outer rings and 7 different ⁇ subunits comprise the inner rings. The ⁇ subunits serve as binding sites for the 19S (PA700) and 1 1 S (PA28) regulatory complexes, as well as a physical barrier for the inner proteolytic chamber formed by the two ⁇ subunit rings. Thus, in vivo, the proteasome is believed to exist as a 26S particle ("the 26S proteasome")- In vivo experiments have shown that inhibition of the 2OS form of the proteasome can be readily correlated to inhibition of 26S proteasome.
  • N- terminal nucleophile hydrolases where the nucleophilic N-terminal residue is, for example, Cys, Ser, Thr, and other nucleophilic moieties.
  • This family includes, for example, penicillin G acylase (PGA), penicillin V acylase (PVA), glutamine PRPP amidotransferase (GAT), and bacterial glycosylasparaginase.
  • chymotrypsin-like activity CT- L
  • trypsin-like activity T-L
  • PGPH peptidylglutamyl peptide hydrolyzing activity
  • One aspect of the invention relates to inhibitors that preferentially inhibit immunoproteasome activity over constitutive proteasome activity.
  • the invention relates to the treatment of immune related diseases, comprising administering a compound of the invention.
  • the invention relates to the treatment of cancer, comprising administering a compound of the invention.
  • One aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • X is selected from O, S, NH, and preferably O;
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A
  • R 1 is selected from H, -Ci- ⁇ alkyl-B, Ci- ⁇ alkoxyalkyl, aryl, and C
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, heteroaryl, and C
  • R 4 is N(R 5 )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci ⁇ alkyl, preferably hydrogen;
  • R s and R 6 together are d. ⁇ alkyl-ZAZ-Ci-ealkyl, ZAZ-Ci- 6 alkyl-ZAZ-Ci -6 alkyl, ZAZ-C thereby forming a ring;
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen, and Cu ⁇ aralkyl, preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Ci- ⁇ alkyl, preferably Ci ⁇ alkyl;
  • R 10 is an N-terminal protecting group
  • R 11 and R 12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Ci ⁇ alkyl, Ci- ⁇ alkenyl, Ci- ⁇ alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci-earalkyl, and C
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, C
  • R 15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci ⁇ alkyl, C
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • M is absent or is Ci-i 2 alkyl, preferably Ci-salkyl;
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-C
  • X is selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci- ⁇ alkyl, preferably O;
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, heteroaryl, and C i -6 heteroaralkyl;
  • R 4 is N(R S )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, preferably hydrogen
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci. 6 alkyl-Y-C
  • R 8 is selected from hydrogen, preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and C ⁇ alkyl, preferably and R 10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
  • R and R 12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, C h alky!, Ci- 6 alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Cj- ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and C ⁇ alkyl, or R 11 and R 12 together are Ci ⁇ alkyl, thereby forming a ring; each R 13 is independently selected from hydrogen and C ⁇ alkyl, preferably Ci- 6 alkyl; and
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci ⁇ alkyl, Ci ⁇ alkenyl, Ci. 6 alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci ⁇ heteroaralkyl;
  • R 15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci- ⁇ alkyi, C- ⁇ hydroxyalkyl, C
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (III) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
  • B is absent or is N(R 9 )R 10 , preferably absent;
  • M is absent or is C
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci- 6 alkyl, preferably O; or
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
  • R 1 is selected from H, aryl, and
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, heteroaryl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl;
  • R 4 is N(R 5 )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, C
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci -6 alkyl-Y-Ci -6 alkyl, Ci -6 alkyl-ZAZ-Ci. 6 alkyl, ZAZ-Ci- 6 alkyl-ZAZ-C
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen, C ⁇ - 6 alkyl, and preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Q- ⁇ alkyl, preferably C
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci- ⁇ alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, each R 16 is independently selected from hydrogen and Ci ⁇ alkyl; or two occurrences of R 1 ! together may be thereby forming a ring together with the intervening boron and oxygen atoms to which they are attached; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond.
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (IV) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
  • M is absent or is C
  • W is selected from -CHO and -B(OR 1 ') 2 ;
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci ⁇ alkyl;
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, C
  • R 4 is N(R 5 )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, C
  • R 5 and R 6 together are d-ealkyl-Y-d-ealkyl, Ci- ⁇ alkyl-ZAZ-Ci-ealkyl, ZAZ-C,. 6 alkyl-ZAZ-C
  • R 8 is selected from hydrogen, and preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and C,- 6 alkyl, preferably and R 10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
  • R 11 and R 12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, C ⁇ alkyl, Ci- ⁇ alkenyl, Ci- ⁇ alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C,. 6 aralkyl, and C
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, C
  • Figure 1 shows the immunoproteasome expression level of certain cell lines and patient samples, including multiple myeloma, leukemias, lymphomas, and solid tumors.
  • RA rheumatoid arthritis
  • the invention involves compounds useful as enzyme inhibitors. These compounds are generally useful to inhibit enzymes having a nucleophilic group at the
  • N-terminus For example, activities of enzymes or enzyme subunits having N-terminal amino acids with nucleophiles in their side chains, such as threonine, serine, or cysteine can be successfully inhibited by the enzyme inhibitors described herein. Activities of enzymes or enzyme subunits having non-amino acid nucleophilic groups at their N- termini, such as, for example, protecting groups or carbohydrates, can also be successfully inhibited by the enzyme inhibitors described herein.
  • N-terminal nucleophiles of Ntn form covalent adducts with the epoxide, aziridine, aldehyde, or borate functional group of the enzyme inhibitors described herein.
  • the N-terminal threonine is believed to irreversibly form a morpholino or piperazino adduct upon reaction with a peptide epoxide or aziridine such as those described below.
  • Such adduct formation would involve ring-opening cleavage of the epoxide or aziridine.
  • Peptides can have a repeating backbone structure with side chains extending from the backbone units. Generally, each backbone unit has a side chain associated with it, although in some cases, the side chain is a hydrogen atom. In other embodiments, not every backbone unit has an associated side chain. Peptides useful in peptide epoxides or peptide aziridines have two or more backbone units.
  • the side chains extending from the backbone units can include natural aliphatic or aromatic amino acid side chains, such as hydrogen (glycine), methyl (alanine), isopropyl (valine), sec-butyl (isoleucine), isobutyl (leucine), phenylmethyl (phenylalanine), and the side chain constituting the amino acid proline.
  • the side chains can also be other branched or unbranched aliphatic or aromatic groups such as ethyl, n- propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, and aryl substituted derivatives such as 1 -phenyl ethyl, 2- phenylethyl, (l-naphthyl)methyl, (2-naphthyl)methyl, l-(l-naphthyl)ethyl, l-(2- naphthyl)ethyl, 2-(l-naphthyl)ethyl, 2-(2-naphthyl)ethyl, and similar compounds.
  • aryl substituted derivatives such as 1 -phenyl ethyl, 2- phenylethyl, (l-naphthyl)methyl, (2-naphthyl)methyl, l-(l-naphthyl)ethyl,
  • aryl groups can be further substituted with branched or unbranched Cl-6alkyl groups, or substituted alkyl groups, acetyl and the like, or further aryl groups, or substituted aryl groups, such as benzoyl and the like. Heteroaryl groups can also be used as side chain substituents.
  • Heteroaryl groups include nitrogen-, oxygen-, and sulfur-containing aryl groups such as thienyl, benzothienyl, naphthothienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, indolyl, purinyl, quinolyl, and the like.
  • polar or charged residues can be introduced into the peptide epoxides or peptide aziridines.
  • Naturally occurring amino acids such as hydroxy-containing (Thr, Tyr, Ser) or sulfur-containing (Met, Cys) can be introduced, as well as non-essential amino acids, for example, taurine, carnitine, citrulline, cystine, ornithine, norleucine and others.
  • Non-naturally occurring side chain substituents with charged or polar moieties can also be included, such as, for example, Cl -6alkyl chains or C6- 12aryl groups with one or more hydroxy, short chain alkoxy, sulfide, thio, carboxyl, ester, phospho, amido or amino groups, or such substituents substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
  • R is the side chain.
  • the backbone units are N-alkylated amide units (for example, N-methyl and the like), olef ⁇ nic analogs (in which one or more amide bonds are replaced by olefinic bonds), tetrazole analogs (in which a tetrazole ring imposes a cis-configuration on the backbone), or combinations of such backbone linkages.
  • the amino acid ⁇ -carbon is modified by ⁇ -alkyl substitution, for example, aminoisobutyric acid.
  • side chains are locally modified, for example, by ⁇ E or ⁇ Z dehydro modification, in which a double bond is present between the ⁇ and ⁇ atoms of the side chain, or for example by ⁇ E or ⁇ Z cyclopropyl modification, in which a cyclopropyl group is present between the ⁇ and ⁇ atoms of the side chain.
  • ⁇ E or ⁇ Z dehydro modification in which a double bond is present between the ⁇ and ⁇ atoms of the side chain
  • ⁇ E or ⁇ Z cyclopropyl modification in which a cyclopropyl group is present between the ⁇ and ⁇ atoms of the side chain.
  • D- amino acids can be used.
  • Further embodiments can include side chain-to-backbone cyclization, disulfide bond formation, lactam formation, azo linkage, and other modifications discussed in "Peptides and Mimics, Design of Conformationally Constrained" by Hruby and Boteju, in "Molecular Biology and Biotechnology
  • One aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • M is absent or is preferably Ci- ⁇ alkyl;
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci- ⁇ alkyl;
  • X is selected from O, S, NH, and N-Q ⁇ alkyl, preferably O;
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A
  • R 1 is selected from H, -Q- ⁇ alkyl-B, Ci- ⁇ alkoxyalkyi, aryl, and
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, heteroaryl, and Ci- ft heteroaralkyl;
  • R 4 is N(R S )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, and preferably hydrogen;
  • R 6 is selected from hydrogen, Ci- ⁇ alkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl, heteroaryl, C
  • -g alkyl-, (R 1 1 O)(R l2 O)P( O)O-Ci -8 alkyl- ZAZ-C 1 .
  • -8 alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-d-galkyl-, (R n O)(R l2 O)P( O)O-C l-8 alkyl-, (R l 3 ) 3 N + -C M2 alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, R l4 SO 2 C ⁇ -8 alkyl-, and R 14 SO 2 NH; preferably an N- capping group, more preferably t-butoxycarbonyl or benzyloxycarbonyl; or R 5 and R 6 together are ZAZ-Ci- 6 alkyl-ZAZ-C
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci ⁇ alkyl, and Ci ⁇ aralkyl, preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Ci- ⁇ alkyl, preferably Ci ⁇ alkyl;
  • R 10 is an N-terminal protecting group
  • R 11 and R 12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, C
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci- ⁇ alkenyl, Cu ⁇ alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, and R 15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci- ⁇ alkyl, Ci ⁇ hydroxyalkyl, Ci- ⁇ alkoxy,
  • R 1 is selected from -Ci- ⁇ alkyl-B and Ci- ⁇ aralkyl.
  • R 1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci- 6 alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from carboxylic acid and ester.
  • R 1 is selected from methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, carboxymethyl, and benzyl.
  • R 1 is -C
  • B is absent.
  • R 2 is selected from Ci- ⁇ aralkyl and C
  • R 2 is selected from Ci- ⁇ alkyl-phenyl, Ci- ⁇ alkyl-thienyl, Ci- ⁇ alkyl-thiazolyl, and d- ⁇ alkyl-isothiazolyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two.
  • R 2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci- 6 alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyario.
  • R 2 is selected from Ci- ⁇ alkyl- phenyl and In certain preferred such embodiments, R 2 is selected
  • R H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu', OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 . In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 .
  • D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
  • R is selected from Ci ⁇ aralkyl and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two.
  • R 3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano.
  • R 3 is selected from C i ⁇ alkyl -phenyl and Ci- ⁇ alkyl-indolyl.
  • R 3 is selected from
  • R H, any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu 1 , OH, CN, CF 3 or CH 3 . In certain embodiments, D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF 3 or CH 3 .
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • R 6 is Ar-Y-
  • each Ar is independently selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
  • Ar maybe substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Q- ⁇ alkyl.
  • Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl.
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from Ar-Y and heterocyclyl.
  • heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl.
  • Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is C
  • L and Q are absent and R 6 is selected from Ci- ⁇ alkenyl, d- ⁇ alkynyl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl and R 6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phenylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl.
  • L is SO 2
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from and aryl.
  • R 6 is selected from methyl and phenyl.
  • R 6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfonyl)ethyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ aralkyl.
  • R 6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • R 6 is aryl.
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from heteroaryl and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine.
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
  • Q is absent or O
  • R 6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Co-ialkyl.
  • R 6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl.
  • -8 alkyl-, R 1 1 ZA-C, .galkyl-ZAZ-Cgalkyl-, (R 1 l O)(R l2 O)P( O)O-C, -g alky!-ZAZ-C
  • R 6 is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-galkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(R 16 )(R 17 ), wherein R 16 and R 17 together are preferably C 1 . 3 alkyl-Y-C 1 . 3 a.kyl, thereby forming a ring.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is (R 13 ) 2 NC
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is selected from Ci ⁇ alkyl, cycloalkyl-M, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 5 is Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Cu ⁇ alkyl, where is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl.
  • L is Q is selected from O and NH and R 6 is Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl.
  • R 5 is Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl, where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyridyl)methyl .
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci- 6alkyl-Y-Ci.6alkyl, Ci ⁇ alkyl-ZA-Ci ⁇ alkyl, or C
  • Q and Y are absent
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci- 3alkyl-Y-C
  • L and Q are absent, and R 5 and R 6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Cioalkyl.
  • Q is absent
  • Y is selected from NH and N-Ci -6 alkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 together Ci -3 alkyl-Y-
  • Y is absent
  • R 5 and R 6 together are
  • R 5 and R 6 together are C ⁇ -2 alkyl-ZA-Ci -2 alkyl.
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen and Ci- ⁇ alkyl.
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen and methyl. In more preferred such embodiments, R 7 and R 8 are both hydrogen.
  • X is O
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently Ci- ⁇ aralkyl
  • R 1 is selected from aryl
  • Ci- ⁇ aralkyl any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including C ⁇ alkyl ester, Cj.salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether substituents.
  • Suitable N-terminal protecting groups known in the art of peptide syntheses include t-butoxy carbonyl (Boc), benzoyl (Bz), fluoren-9-ylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), triphenylmethyl (trityl) and trichloroethoxycarbonyl (Troc) and the like.
  • N-protecting groups e.g., the benzyloxy carbonyl group or the t- butyloxycarbonyl group (Boc)
  • various coupling reagents e.g., dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), 1 ,3-diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC), l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC), N-hydroxyazabenzotriazole (HATU), carbonyldiimidazole, or 1-hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate (HOBT), and various cleavage conditions: for example, trifluoracetic acid (TFA), HCl in dioxane, hydrogenation on Pd-C in organic solvents (such as methanol or ethyl acetate), boron tris(trifluoroacetate), and cyanogen bromide, and reaction in solution with isolation and purification of intermediates are well-
  • Suitable protecting N- terminal protecting groups may also be found, for example, in Greene, T.W.; Wuts, P.G.M. "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", 3rd ed.; Wiley: New York, 1999 or Kocie ⁇ ski, P. J., "Protecting Groups", Georg Thieme Verlag, 1994.
  • the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , or R 3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 respectively is D. In certain preferred such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 1 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 2 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 3 is D. In certain embodiments the stereochemical configuration of at least two of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 respectively is D. In yet another preferred embodiment, the stereochemical configuration of all three of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 respectively is D.
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • B is absent or is N(R 9 )R 10 , preferably absent;
  • M is absent or is preferably Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-C
  • X is selected from O, S, NH, and N-C
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, heteroaryl, and
  • R 4 is N(R 5 )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, C
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci- ⁇ alkyl-Y-d- ⁇ alkyl, Ci- 6 alkyl-ZAZ-Ci -6 alkyl, ZAZ-Ci- ZAZ-C i-ealkyl-ZAZ, or Ci -6 alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring;
  • R 8 is selected from hydrogen, Ci- ⁇ alkyl, and preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and preferably C
  • R 1 ' and R 12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, C h alky!, Ci- ⁇ alkenyl, Ci ⁇ alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and or R 1 ' and R 12 together are thereby forming a ring; each R 13 is independently selected from hydrogen and preferably Ci- ⁇ alkyl; and
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci ⁇ alkyl, C ⁇ alkenyl, C
  • R 15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci ⁇ alkyl, Ci ⁇ hydroxyalkyl, Ci ⁇ alkoxy, -C(O)OCi .ealkyl, -C(O)NHC ⁇ -6 alkyl, and d -6 aralkyl, preferably C
  • R 2 is selected from Ci. ⁇ aralkyl and Ci-eheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R 2 is selected from and wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R 2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R 2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R 2 is selected from Ci ⁇ alkyl- phenyl and Ci- ⁇ alkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R 2 is selected from
  • R H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu 1 , OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 . In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 . In certain preferred such embodiments where D is attached to a six-membered ring, D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
  • R 3 is selected from Ci- ⁇ aralkyl and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two.
  • R 3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci- ⁇ alkyi ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano.
  • R 3 is selected from C i ⁇ alkyl -phenyl and Ci ⁇ alkyl-indolyl.
  • R 3 is selected from
  • R H, any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu', OH, CN, CF 3 or CH 3 . In certain embodiments, D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF 3 or CH 3 .
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • R 6 is Ar-Y-
  • each Ar is independently selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
  • Ar may be substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Ci- 6 alkyl.
  • Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl.
  • heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl.
  • Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
  • L and Q are absent and R 6 is selected from C h alky., Ci- 6 alkenyl, Ci- ⁇ alkynyl, Ci. 6 ara.kyl, and C
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl and R 6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phcnylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl.
  • R 6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfonyl)ethyl .
  • L is In certain such embodiments, R 6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 5 is and R 6 is aryl.
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from heteroaryl and
  • R 6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine.
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
  • Q is absent or O
  • R 6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Co-ialkyl.
  • R 6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl.
  • R 6 is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(R 16 )(R'. 7 ), wherein R 16 and R 17 together are preferably thereby forming a ring.
  • Q is absent
  • M is Ci -g alkyl
  • R 6 is (R l3 ) 2 NC
  • R 6 is heterocyclylM-, where heterocyclyl is selected from morpholino, piperidino, piperazino, and pyrrolidino.
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is selected from Ci ⁇ alkyl, cycloalkyl-M, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ alkyl, where Ci- ⁇ alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl.
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl.
  • R 5 is Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl, where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyri d yl)methyl .
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci- 6 alkyl-Y-C
  • Q and Y are absent
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci. 3 alkyl-Y-Ci. 3 alkyl.
  • L and Q are absent, and R 5 and R 6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Cioalkyl.
  • Q is absent
  • Y is selected from NH and N-Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 together Ci ⁇ alkyl-Y- C 1 . 3 a.kyl.
  • Y is absent
  • R 5 and R 6 together are C
  • R 5 and R 6 together are C
  • R 8 is selected from hydrogen and Ci. 6 alkyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R 8 is selected from hydrogen and methyl. In more preferred such embodiments, R 8 is hydrogen.
  • X is O
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently Ci- ⁇ aralkyl
  • R 1 is selected from aryl
  • Ci- ⁇ aralkyl any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Cu ⁇ alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether substituents.
  • the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R 2 or R 3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R 2 and R 3 respectively is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 2 is D. In such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 3 is D. In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of both of the carbons bearing R 2 and R 3 respectively is D.
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (III) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
  • B is absent or is N(R 9 )R 10 , preferably absent;
  • M is absent or is C
  • W is selected from -CHO and -B(OR 1 ') 2 ;
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Q- ⁇ alkyl
  • each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci ⁇ alkyl, preferably O; or
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A
  • R 1 is selected from H, -Ci ⁇ alkyl-B, Ci ⁇ hydroxyalkyl, Ci ⁇ alkoxyalkyl, aryl, and Ci- 6 aralkyl;
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, heteroaryl, and C i ⁇ heteroaralkyl ;
  • R 4 is N(R 5 )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and preferably hydrogen
  • R 5 and R 6 together are C
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen, preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Ci ⁇ alkyl, preferably Ci ⁇ alkyl; and R is an N-terminal protecting group;
  • R 1 ' and R 12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Ci- ⁇ alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and Ci- ⁇ alkyl, or R 1 ' and R 12 together are thereby forming a ring; each R 13 is independently selected from hydrogen and preferably Ci.
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci- ⁇ alkyl, C
  • R 1 is selected from — Ci ⁇ alkyl-B and C ⁇ -6aralkyl.
  • R 1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Q- ⁇ alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from carboxylic acid and ester.
  • R 1 is selected from methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, carboxymethyl, and benzyl.
  • R 1 is In certain preferred such embodiments, B is absent.
  • R 2 is selected from and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 2 is selected from Ci- ⁇ alkyl-indolyl, Ci- ⁇ alkyl-thienyl, Ci ⁇ alkyl-thiazolyl, and Ci- ⁇ alkyl-isothiazolyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two.
  • R 2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including ester, Ci.salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano.
  • R 2 is selected from C
  • R 2 is selected from
  • R H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu 1 , OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 . In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 .
  • D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
  • R 3 is selected from Ci ⁇ aralkyl and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two.
  • R 3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci ⁇ alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano.
  • R 3 is selected from and Ci-salkyl-indolyl.
  • R 3 is selected from
  • Ar may be substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Cj- ⁇ alkyl.
  • Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl.
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from Ar-Y and heterocyclyl.
  • heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl.
  • Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is Ci-ealkenyl, where Ci ⁇ alkenyl is a substituted vinyl group where the substituent is preferably an aryl or heteroaryl group, more preferably a phenyl group optionally substituted with one to four substituents.
  • L and Q are absent and R 6 is selected from Ci ⁇ alkyl, Ci. 6 alkynyl, d- ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 5 is and R 6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phenylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl.
  • L is SO 2
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from and aryl.
  • R 6 is selected from methyl and phenyl.
  • R 6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfbnyl)ethyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ aralkyl.
  • R 6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 5 is and R 6 is aryl.
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from heteroaryl and C ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, fiiran, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine.
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
  • Q is absent or O
  • R 6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Qj-ialkyl.
  • R 6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl.
  • Q is absent
  • Z is O
  • M is C
  • R 6 is selected from R"ZA-C
  • R is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(R 16 )(R 17 ), wherein R 16 and R 17 together are Ci-ealkyl-Y-Ci ⁇ alkyl, preferably C
  • Q is absent
  • M is C
  • R 6 is (R 13 ⁇ N C t .gal kyl or
  • R 6 is heterocyclylM-, where heterocyclyl is selected from morpholino, piperidino, piperazino, and pyrrolidino.
  • R 5 is Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is selected from Ci- ⁇ alkyl, cycloalkyl-M, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R s is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Cu ⁇ alkyl, where Ci ⁇ alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl.
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH and R 6 is Cj. 6 aralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl.
  • R 5 is Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyridyl)methyl.
  • R s and R 6 together are Ci- 6 alkyl-Y-Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci ⁇ alkyl-ZA-Ci ⁇ alkyl, or Ci ⁇ alkyl-A, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond, thereby forming a ring.
  • Q and Y are absent
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci- 3 alkyl-Y-C ⁇ - 3 alkyl.
  • L and Q are absent, and R 5 and
  • R 6 together are C
  • Q is absent
  • Y is selected from NH and N-C ⁇ alkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Ci ⁇ alkyl-Y- Ci- 3 alkyl.
  • Y is absent
  • R 5 and R 6 together are
  • R 5 and R 6 together are C
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen and C
  • X is O
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently and R 1 is selected from Ci- ⁇ alkoxyalkyl, aryl, and Q- ⁇ aralkyl, any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci- ⁇ alkyl ester, C
  • the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , or R 3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 respectively is D.
  • the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 1 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 2 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 3 is D. In certain embodiments the stereochemical configuration of at least two of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 respectively is D. In yet another preferred embodiment, the stereochemical configuration of all three of the carbons bearing R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 respectively is D.
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (IV) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
  • A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
  • M is absent or is C
  • W is selected from -CHO and -B(OR 1 ') 2 ;
  • Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci-ealkyl
  • Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from aryl, C ⁇ aralkyl, heteroaryl, and C i - ⁇ heteroaralkyl ;
  • R 4 is N(R 5 )L-Q-R 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, Ci ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci ⁇ alkyl, preferably hydrogen;
  • R 5 and R 6 together are ZAZ-Ci- ⁇ alkyl-ZAZ-Ci-ealkyl, ZAZ-C i -6 alkyl -ZAZ, or Ci -6 alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring;
  • R is selected from hydrogen, and Ci-earalkyl, preferably hydrogen;
  • R 9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and preferably and R 10 is an N-terminal protecting group
  • R 1 ' and R 1 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Ci ⁇ alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and thereby forming a ring; each R 13 is independently selected from hydrogen and C i galkyl, preferably Ci- ⁇ alkyl; and
  • R 14 is independently selected from hydrogen, C
  • R 2 is selected from Ci ⁇ aralkyl and Ci. 6 heteroaralkyl.
  • R 2 is selected from Ci- ⁇ alkyl-thienyl, Ci- ⁇ alkyl-thiazolyl, and C ⁇ - 6 alkyl-isothiazolyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two.
  • R 2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including ester, C ] -5 alkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R 2 is selected from phenyl and Ci ⁇ alkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R 2 is selected
  • R H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu 1 , OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 . In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF 3 and CH 3 ..
  • D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
  • R 3 is selected from Ci ⁇ aralkyl and Ci ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two.
  • R 3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci ⁇ alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether.
  • R 3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano.
  • R 3 is selected from Ci ⁇ alkyl-phenyl and Ci ⁇ alkyl-indolyl.
  • R 3 is selected from
  • Ar is independently selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
  • Ar maybe substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Ci- ⁇ alkyl.
  • Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl.
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from Ar-Y and heterocyclyl.
  • heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl.
  • Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
  • R is hydrogen
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is Ci- 6 alkenyl, where is a substituted vinyl group where the substituent is preferably an aryl or heteroaryl group, more preferably a phenyl group optionally substituted with one to four substituents.
  • L and Q are absent and R 6 is selected from
  • R 5 is Ci- ⁇ alkyi and R 6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phenylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl.
  • R 6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfonyl)ethyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is In certain such embodiments, R 6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 5 is C
  • R 6 is aryl.
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
  • Q is absent
  • R 6 is selected from heteroaryl and Ci- ⁇ heteroaralkyl.
  • R 6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine.
  • R 6 is selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
  • Q is absent or O
  • R 6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Co-ialkyl.
  • R 6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl.
  • R 6 is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(R I6 )(R 17 ), wherein R 16 and R 17 together are preferably thereby forming a ring.
  • Q is absent
  • M is C
  • R 6 is (R 13 ) 2 NC
  • R 6 is heterocyclylM-, where heterocyclyl is selected from morpholino, piperidino, piperazino, and pyrrolidino.
  • R 5 is Q ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is selected from cycloalkyl-M, Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, and Ci-nheteroaralkyl.
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Ci ⁇ alkyl, where Ci ⁇ alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl.
  • R 5 is Ci ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl.
  • R 5 is Ci- ⁇ alkyl
  • Q is selected from O and NH
  • R 6 is Ci ⁇ heteroaralkyl, where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyridyl)methyl.
  • L and Q are absent, and R 5 and R 6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Qoalkyl.
  • Y is absent
  • R 5 and R 6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Cioalkyl.
  • R 8 is selected from hydrogen and In certain preferred such embodiments, R 8 is selected from hydrogen and methyl. In more preferred such embodiments, R 8 is hydrogen.
  • X is O
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently Ci- ⁇ aralkyl
  • R 1 is selected from Ci ⁇ alkyl, Ci ⁇ hydroxyalkyl, Ci -6 alkoxyalkyl, aryl, and Ci- ⁇ aralkyl, any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci ⁇ alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether substituents.
  • the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R 2 or R 3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R 2 and R 3 respectively is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R 2 is D. In such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R is D. In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of both of the carbons bearing R 2 and R 3 respectively is D.
  • One aspect of the invention relates to inhibitors that preferentially inhibit immunoproteasome activity over constitutive proteasome activity.
  • the EC50 ratio of a compound of any one of formulae I to IV in an assay of constitutive proteasome activity as compared to the EC 50 of the same compound in an assay of immunoproteasome activity is greater than 1.
  • the EC5 0 is greater than 2, 3, 4 or even 5. Suitable assays for the determination of the constitutive proteasome activity and the immunoproteasome activity are described herein (see Example 18).
  • C x-y alkyl refers to substituted or unsubstituted saturated hydrocarbon groups, including straight-chain alkyl and branched-chain alkyl groups that contain from x to y carbons in the chain, including haloalkyl groups such as trifluoromethyl and 2,2,2-tirfluoroethyl, etc. Coalkyl indicates a hydrogen where the group is in a terminal position, a bond if internal.
  • C2 -y alkenyl and “C 2- y alkynyl” refer to substituted or unsubstituted unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl group having an oxygen attached thereto. Representative alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, tert-butoxy and the like.
  • An "ether” is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxy.
  • Ci- ⁇ alkoxyalkyl refers to a Ci ⁇ alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group, thereby forming an ether.
  • Ci-earalkyl refers to a Ci- ⁇ alkyl group substituted with an aryl group.
  • amine and “amino” are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines and salts thereof, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by the general formulae:
  • R 9 , R 10 and R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) m -R 8 , or R 9 and R 10 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
  • R 8 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocyclyl or a polycyclyl; and m is zero or an integer from 1 to 8.
  • only one of R 9 or R 10 can be a carbonyl, e.g., R 9 , R 10 , and the nitrogen together do not form an imide.
  • R 9 and R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, or -(CH 2 )I n -R 8 -
  • an amino group is basic, meaning it has a pK a > 7.00.
  • the protonated forms of these functional groups have pKaS above 7.00.
  • the terms "amide” and "amido" are art-recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: wherein R 9 , R 10 are as defined above. Preferred embodiments of the amide will not include imides which may be unstable.
  • aryl as used herein includes 5-, 6-, and 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted single-ring aromatic groups in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
  • aryl also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
  • Aryl groups include benzene, naphthalene, phenanthrene, phenol, aniline, and the like.
  • carrier refers to a non- aromatic substituted or unsubstituted ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
  • carrier also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is carbocyclic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
  • carbonyl is art-recognized and includes such moieties as can be represented by the general formula:
  • R 1 ' represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) m -R 8 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt
  • R 1 1 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH 2 ) in -R 8 , where m and R 8 are as defined above.
  • X is an oxygen and R 1 ' or R 1 ' is not hydrogen
  • the formula represents an "ester”.
  • R 1 ' is a hydrogen
  • the formula represents a "carboxylic acid”.
  • enzyme can be any partially or wholly proteinaceous molecule which carries out a chemical reaction in a catalytic manner.
  • Such enzymes can be native enzymes, fusion enzymes, proenzymes, apoenzymes, denatured enzymes, farnesylated enzymes, ubiquitinated enzymes, fatty acylated enzymes, gerangeranylated enzymes, GPI-linked enzymes, lipid-linked enzymes, prenylated enzymes, naturally- occurring or artificially-generated mutant enzymes, enzymes with side chain or backbone modifications, enzymes having leader sequences, and enzymes complexed with non-proteinaceous material, such as proteoglycans, proteoliposomes.
  • Enzymes can be made by any means, including natural expression, promoted expression, cloning, various solution-based and solid-based peptide syntheses, and similar methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • heteroaryl includes substituted or unsubstituted aromatic 5- to 7- membered ring structures, more preferably 5- to 6-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms.
  • heteroaryl also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heteroaromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
  • Heteroaryl groups include, for example, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like.
  • heteroatom as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, and sulfur.
  • heterocyclyl or “heterocyclic group” refer to substituted or unsubstituted non-aromatic 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7- membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms.
  • heterocyclyl or “heterocyclic group” also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heterocyclic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
  • Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, tetrahydropyran, piperidine, piperazine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, lactones, lactams, and the like.
  • Ci- ⁇ hydroxyalkyl refers to a Ci ⁇ alkyl group substituted with a hydroxy group.
  • inhibitor is meant to describe a compound that blocks or reduces an activity of an enzyme (for example, inhibition of proteolytic cleavage of standard fluorogenic peptide substrates such as suc-LLVY-AMC, Box- LLR-AMC and Z-LLE-AMC, inhibition of various catalytic activities of the 2OS proteasome).
  • An inhibitor can act with competitive, uncompetitive, or noncompetitive inhibition.
  • An inhibitor can bind reversibly or irreversibly, and therefore the term includes compounds that are suicide substrates of an enzyme.
  • An inhibitor can modify one or more sites on or near the active site of the enzyme, or it can cause a conformational change elsewhere on the enzyme.
  • peptide includes not only standard amide linkage with standard ⁇ -substituents, but commonly utilized peptidomimetics, other modified linkages, non-naturally occurring side chains, and side chain modifications, as detailed below.
  • polycyclyl or “polycyclic” refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings".
  • rings e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls
  • Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • preventing is art-recognized, and when used in relation to a condition, such as a local recurrence (e.g., pain), a disease such as cancer, a syndrome complex such as heart failure or any other medical condition, is well understood in the art, and includes administration of a composition which reduces the frequency of, or delays the onset of, symptoms of a medical condition in a subject relative to a subject which does not receive the composition.
  • a condition such as a local recurrence (e.g., pain)
  • a disease such as cancer
  • a syndrome complex such as heart failure or any other medical condition
  • prevention of cancer includes, for example, reducing the number of detectable cancerous growths in a population of patients receiving a prophylactic treatment relative to an untreated control population, and/or delaying the appearance of detectable cancerous growths in a treated population versus an untreated control population, e.g., by a statistically and/or clinically significant amount.
  • Prevention of an infection includes, for example, reducing the number of diagnoses of the infection in a treated population versus an untreated control population, and/or delaying the onset of symptoms of the infection in a treated population versus an untreated control population.
  • Prevention of pain includes, for example, reducing the magnitude of, or alternatively delaying, pain sensations experienced by subjects in a treated population versus an untreated control population.
  • prodrug encompasses compounds that, under physiological conditions, are converted into therapeutically active agents.
  • a common method for making a prodrug is to include selected moieties that are hydrolyzed under physiological conditions to reveal the desired molecule.
  • the prodrug is converted by an enzymatic activity of the host animal.
  • prophylactic or therapeutic treatment is art-recognized and includes administration to the host of one or more of the subject compositions. If it is administered prior to clinical manifestation of the unwanted condition (e.g., disease or other unwanted state of the host animal) then the treatment is prophylactic, (i.e., it protects the host against developing the unwanted condition), whereas if it is administered after manifestation of the unwanted condition, the treatment is therapeutic, (i.e., it is intended to diminish, ameliorate, or stabilize the existing unwanted condition or side effects thereof).
  • the unwanted condition e.g., disease or other unwanted state of the host animal
  • substituted refers to moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the backbone. It will be understood that “substitution” or “substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. As used herein, the term “substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and non-aromatic substituents of organic compounds.
  • the permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds.
  • the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms.
  • Substituents can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an alkoxycarbonyl, a formyl, or an acyl), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphate, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfhydryl, an alkylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an aralkyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety. It will be understood by
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” of a compound with respect to the subject method of treatment refers to an amount of the compound(s) in a preparation which, when administered as part of a desired dosage regimen (to a mammal, preferably a human) alleviates a symptom, ameliorates a condition, or slows the onset of disease conditions according to clinically acceptable standards for the disorder or condition to be treated or the cosmetic purpose, e.g., at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
  • thioether refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur moiety attached thereto.
  • the "thioether” is represented by - S-alkyl.
  • Representative thioether groups include methylthio, ethylthio, and the like.
  • treating includes reversing, reducing, or arresting the symptoms, clinical signs, and underlying pathology of a condition in manner to improve or stabilize a subject's condition.
  • proteasome inhibition has been suggested as a prevention and/or treatment of a multitude of diseases including, but not limited to, proliferative diseases, neurotoxic/degenerative diseases, ischemic conditions, inflammation, immune-related diseases, HIV, cancers, organ graft rejection, septic shock, viral and parasitic infections, conditions associated with acidosis, macular degeneration, pulmonary conditions, muscle wasting diseases, f ⁇ brotic diseases, bone and hair growth diseases.
  • Proteasome inhibitors can be used to treat conditions mediated directly by the proteolytic function of the proteasome such as muscle wasting, or mediated indirectly via proteins which are processed by the proteasome such as NF- ⁇ B.
  • the proteasome participates in the rapid elimination and post-translational processing of proteins (e.g., enzymes) involved in cellular regulation (e.g., cell cycle, gene transcription, and metabolic pathways), intercellular communication, and the immune response (e.g., antigen presentation).
  • proteasome inhibitors inhibit both the constitutive and immuno- forms of the proteasome. Even bortezomib, the only FDA-approved proteasome inhibitor for the treatment of relapsed multiple myeloma patients, does not distinguish between the two forms (Altun et al, Cancer Res 65:7896, 2005). Thus, what is known about therapeutic proteasome inhibition is based on work with molecules that inhibit both forms of the proteasome.
  • compounds of the invention may be beneficial for reducing the severity of side effects associated with molecules that inhibit both forms of the proteasome.
  • Immunoproteasome expression occurs predominantly in cells and organs that make up the lymphatic system, such as white blood cells(leukocytes), bone marrow, and the thymus, spleen and lymph nodes. Although some organs preferentially express constitutive proteasomes (e.g., heart), others such as adrenal, liver, lung and gut, appear to express both forms.
  • the immune system of which leukocytes and lymphoid tissues play a major role, is responsible for protecting an organism from outside biological influences. When functioning properly, it protects the body against bacterial and viral infections. The immune system also screens for autologous cells that have undergone oncogenic transformation.
  • the invention relates to a method for inhibiting antigen presentation in a cell, including exposing the cell to a compound described herein. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for altering the repertoire of antigenic peptides produced by the proteasome or other Ntn with multicatalytic activity.
  • a different set of antigenic peptides may be produced by the remaining constitutive proteasome and presented in MHC molecules on the surfaces of cells than would be produced and presented without any enzyme inhibition.
  • immune-related conditions Several disorders and disease states have been associated with aberrant immune system function, herein referred to as immune-related conditions. Perhaps the most common immune-related condition is the allergic disorders such as allergies, asthma and atopic dermatitis like eczema. These occur when the immune system overreacts to exposure to antigens in the environment.
  • a further embodiment is a method for suppressing the immune system of a subject including administering to the subject an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor compound in a manner described herein.
  • Immunodeficiency disorders occur when a part of the immune system is not working properly or is not present. They can affect B lymophyctes, T lymphocytes, or phagocytes and be either inherited (e.g., IgA deficiency, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID), thymic dysplasia and chronic granulomatous) or acquired (e.g., acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS), human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) and drug-induced immunodeficiencies).
  • a dosing strategy utilizing selective proteasome inhibitors of the invention may be used to treat immune-related conditions such as immunodeficiency disorders.
  • autoimmune disorders In autoimmune disorders, the immune system inappropriately attacks the body's healthy organs and tissues as if they were foreign invaders.
  • An example of an autoimmune disease is Sjogren's Syndrome, which is characterized by infiltration and focal accumulation of lymphocytes in the exocrine glands.
  • Sjogren's Syndrome which is characterized by infiltration and focal accumulation of lymphocytes in the exocrine glands.
  • a study examining the proteasome expression level revealed a significant up-regulation of beta5i (LMP7) exclusively in the salivary glands of SS patients (Egerer et al, Arthritis Rheum 54: 1501 -
  • Tissue/organ transplant rejection occurs when the immune system mistakenly attacks the cells being introduced to the host's body.
  • GVHD vascular endothelial hyperplasia
  • T cells from the donor tissue go on the offensive and attack the host's tissues.
  • autoimmune disease, transplant rejection and GVHD modulating the immune system by treating the subject with a composition of the invention could be beneficial.
  • Inflammation is the first response of the immune system to infection or irritation.
  • a cellular component of inflammation involves the movement of leukocytes, which express immunoproteasome, from blood vessels into the inflamed tissue. These cells take on the important role of removing the irritant, bacteria, parasite or cell debris.
  • Proteasome inhibitors are already known to have anti-inflammatory activity (Meng et al, PNAS 96:10403-10408, 1999).
  • In cases of chronic inflammation which is characterized by a dominating presence of macrophages; the cells that originally served as defensive agents begin to release toxins and cytokines, including TNF- ⁇ , now become injurious to the body, resulting in tissue damage and loss.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating inflammation and inflammatory diseases comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor compound described herein.
  • Inflammatory diseases include acute (e.g., bronchitis, conjunctivitis, pancreatitis) and chronic conditions (e.g., chronic cholecstitis, bronchiectasis, aortic valve stenosis, restenosis, psoriasis and arthritis), along with conditions associated with inflammation such as fibrosis, infection and ischemia. Following tissue damage, including damage due to the inflammation process, progression of regeneration and repair begins.
  • lost tissue is replaced by proliferation of cells of the same type, which reconstruct the normal architecture.
  • improper regeneration of the tissue architecture may have severe consequences.
  • the regenerated tissue forms an abnormal nodular architecture leading to cirrhosis and portal hypertension.
  • the repair process is where lost tissue is replaced by a fibrous scar which is produced from granulation tissue.
  • Fibrosis is the excessive and persistent formation of scar tissue resulting from the hyperproliferative growth of fibroblasts and is associated with activation of the TGF- ⁇ signaling pathway. Fibrosis involves extensive deposition of extracellular matrix and can occur within virtually any tissue or across several different tissues.
  • the level of intracellular signaling protein (Smad) that activate transcription of target genes upon TGF- ⁇ stimulation is regulated by proteasome activity (Xu et al., 2000).
  • Smad intracellular signaling protein
  • certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method for treating hyperproliferative conditions such as diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration, diabetic nephropathy, glomerulosclerosis, IgA nephropathy, cirrhosis, biliary atresia, congestive heart failure, scleroderma, radiation-induced fibrosis, and lung fibrosis (idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, collagen vascular disease, sarcoidosis, interstitial lung diseases and extrinsic lung disorders).
  • the treatment of burn victims is often hampered by fibrosis, thus, in certain embodiments, the invention relates to the topical or systemic administration of inhibitors to treat burns. Wound closure following surgery is often associated with disfiguring scars, which may be prevented by inhibition of fibrosis.
  • the invention relates to a method for the prevention or reduction of scarring.
  • LPS lipopolysaccharide
  • TNF ⁇ systemic inflammatory response syndrome
  • the proteasome inhibitors disclosed herein may be used for the inhibition of TNF ⁇ to prevent and/or treat septic shock.
  • the disclosed compositions are useful for the treatment of a parasitic infection, such as infections caused by protozoan parasites.
  • the proteasome of these parasites is considered to be involved primarily in cell differentiation and replication activities (Paugam et al., Trends Parasitol. 2003, 19(2): 55-59).
  • entamoeba species have been shown to lose encystation capacity when exposed to proteasome inhibitors (Gonzales, et al., Arch. Med. Res. 1997, 28, Spec No: 139-140).
  • the proteasome inhibitor compositions herein are useful for the treatment of parasitic infections in humans caused by a protozoan parasite selected from Plasmodium sps. (including P.
  • compositions are useful for the treatment of parasitic infections in animals and livestock caused by a protozoan parasite selected from Plasmodium hermani, Cryptosporidium sps., Echinococcus granulosus, Eimeria tenella, Sarcocystis neurona, and Neurospora crassa.
  • a protozoan parasite selected from Plasmodium hermani, Cryptosporidium sps., Echinococcus granulosus, Eimeria tenella, Sarcocystis neurona, and Neurospora crassa.
  • Other compounds useful as proteasome inhibitors in the treatment of parasitic diseases are described in WO 98/10779, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
  • the proteasome inhibitor compositions inhibit proteasome activity in a parasite without recovery in white blood cells.
  • the long half-life of blood cells may provide prolonged protection with regard to therapy against recurring exposures to parasites.
  • the proteasome inhibitors described herein may provide prolonged protection with regard to chemoprophylaxis against future infection.
  • Viral infections contribute to the pathology of many diseases.
  • Heart conditions such as ongoing myocarditis and dilated cardiomyopathy have been linked to the coxsackievirus B3.
  • all three immunoproteasome subunits were uniformly up-regulated in hearts of mice which developed chronic myocarditis (Szalay et al, Am J Pathol 168: 1542-52, 2006).
  • Some viruses utilize the ubiquitin-proteasome system in the viral entry step where the virus is released from the endosome into the cytosol.
  • the mouse hepatitis virus (MHV) belongs to the Coronaviridae family, which also includes the severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) coronvirus.
  • hepatitis viruses may also utilize the ubiquitin-proteasome degradation pathway for secretion, morphogenesis and pathogenesis.
  • the bacterium Listeria monocytogenes causes a condition known as listeriosis, the manifestations of which range from mild (nausea, vomiting and diarrhea) to severe (septicemia, meningitis, encephalitis).
  • proteasome subunit composition A quantitative analysis of changes in proteasome subunit composition revealed that infection of mice with lymphocytic choriomeningitis virus or Listeria monocytogenes lead to an almost complete replacement of constitutive proteasomes by immunoproteasomes in the liver within seven days (Khan et al, J Immunol 167:6859-6868, 2001).
  • Prokaryotes have what is equivalent to the eukaryote 2OS proteasome particle. While the subunit composition of the prokaryote 2OS particle is simpler than that of eukaryotes, it does have the ability to hydrolyze peptide bonds in a similar manner.
  • an embodiment of this invention relates to a method of treating prokaryotic infections, comprising administering to a subject an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor composition disclosed herein.
  • Prokaryotic infections may include diseases caused by either mycobacteria (such as tuberculosis, leprosy or Buruli Ulcer) or archaebacteria.
  • the invention relates to a method for treating infection (e.g., bacterial, parasitic or viral), including contacting a cell with (or administering to a subject) an effective amount of a compound disclosed herein.
  • infection e.g., bacterial, parasitic or viral
  • Ischemia and reperfusion injury results in hypoxia, a condition in which there is a deficiency of oxygen reaching the tissues of the body. This condition causes increased degradation of I ⁇ -B ⁇ , thereby resulting in the activation of NF- ⁇ B (Koong et al., 1994).
  • TNF- ⁇ and lipopolysaccharide also stimulate NF- ⁇ B activation. It has been demonstrated that the severity of injury resulting in hypoxia can be reduced with the administration of a proteasome inhibitor (Gao et al., 2000; Bao et al., 2001; Pye et al., 2003).
  • certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method of treating an ischemic condition or reperfusion injury comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor compound disclosed herein.
  • ischemic condition or reperfusion injury examples include, but are not limited to, acute coronary syndrome (vulnerable plaques), arterial occlusive disease (cardiac, cerebral, peripheral arterial and vascular occlusions), atherosclerosis (coronary sclerosis, coronary artery disease), infarctions, heart failure, pancreatitis, myocardial hypertrophy, stenosis, and restenosis.
  • Cachexia is a syndrome characterized by wasting of skeletal muscle associated with enhanced proteolysis due to the ubiquitin-proteasome pathway. Inhibiting the proteasome reduces proteolysis, thereby reducing both muscle protein loss and the nitrogenous load on kidneys or liver (Tawa et al., JCI 100:197-203, 1997).
  • cachexia elevated expression of proinflammatory cytokines, TNF- ⁇ and IFN- ⁇ , both of which stimulate expression of immunoproteasome subunits, have been reported (Acharyya et al., JCI 1 14:370-378, 2004). In fact, most types of muscle atrophy exhibit elevated rates of protein degradation (Lecker et al., FASEB J 18:39-51, 2004).
  • One embodiment of the invention relates to the treatment of cachexia and muscle- wasting diseases.
  • Methods of the invention are useful for treating conditions such as cancer, chronic infectious diseases, fever, muscle disuse (atrophy) and denervation, nerve injury, fasting, renal failure associated with acidosis, and hepatic failure. See, e.g., Goldberg, U.S. Patent No. 5,340,736.
  • proteasome inhibitors block both degradation and processing of ubiquitinated NF-KB in vitro and in vivo.
  • proteasome inhibitors also block IKB-A degradation and NF-KB activation (Palombella, et al. Cell (1994) 78:773-785; and Traenckner, et al., EMBO J. (1994) 13:5433-5441).
  • One embodiment of the invention is a method for inhibiting I ⁇ B- ⁇ degradation, including contacting the cell with a compound described herein.
  • the invention relates to methods for affecting cyclin- dependent eukaryotic cell cycles, including exposing a cell (in vitro or in vivo) to a proteasome inhibitor disclosed herein.
  • Cyclins are proteins involved in cell cycle control.
  • the proteasome participates in the degradation of cyclins.
  • Examples of cyclins include mitotic cyclins, Gl cyclins, and cyclin B. Degradation of cyclins enables a cell to exit one cell cycle stage (e.g., mitosis) and enter another (e.g., division). It is believed all cyclins are associated with p34 cdc2 protein kinase or related kinases.
  • the proteolysis targeting signal is localized to amino acids 42-
  • RAALGNISEN-50 (destruction box).
  • cyclin is converted to a form vulnerable to a ubiquitin ligase or that a cyclin-specific ligase is activated during mitosis (Ciechanover, A., Cell, (1994) 79:13-21).
  • Inhibition of the proteasome inhibits cyclin degradation, and therefore inhibits cell proliferation, for example, in cyclin- related cancers (Kumatori et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1990) 87:7071-7075).
  • the invention relates to a method for treating a proliferative disease in a subject (e.g., cancer, psoriasis, or restenosis), comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor composition in a manner disclosed herein.
  • a proliferative disease e.g., cancer, psoriasis, or restenosis
  • the invention also relates to a method for treating cycl in-related inflammation in a subject, comprising adminstering to a subject a therapeutically effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor composition in a manner described herein.
  • the invention relates to methods for reducing the rate of intracellular protein degradation in a cell.
  • Each of these methods comprises contacting a cell (in vivo or in vitro, e.g., a muscle in a subject) with an effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a proteasome inhibitor disclosed herein.
  • AD Alzheimer's disease
  • Pathological hallmarks of the disease include senile amyloid plaques, neurofibrillary tangles, dystrophic neuritis and significant neuronal loss in selected regions of the brain.
  • Microglia the resident macrophages in the brain, release numerous proinflammatory cytokines, including .
  • TNF- ⁇ when activated by A ⁇ 42, a peptide associated with neuritic and vascular amyloid plaques. This microglial-mediated inflammatory response contributes to significant neuronal loss.
  • Neurodegenerative diseases and conditions includes, but not limited to, stroke, ischemic damage to the nervous system, neural trauma (e.g., percussive brain damage, spinal cord injury, and traumatic damage to the nervous system), multiple sclerosis and other immune-mediated neuropathies (e.g., Guillain- Barre syndrome and its variants, acute motor axonal neuropathy, acute inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, and Fisher Syndrome), HIV/AIDS dementia complex, axonomy, diabetic neuropathy, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, multiple sclerosis, bacterial, parasitic, fungal, and viral meningitis, encephalitis, vascular dementia, multi -infarct dementia, Lewy body dementia, frontal lobe dementia such as Pick's disease, subcortical dementias (such as Huntington or progressive supranuclear palsy), focal cortical
  • neural trauma e.g., percussive brain damage, spinal cord injury, and traumatic damage to the nervous system
  • the disclosed proteasome inhibitor compositions may be useful in the treatment and/or prevention of diseases associated with bone loss, such as osteroporosis.
  • Cancer is a general term for disease characterized by uncontrolled, abnormal growth of cells. Many cancers arise via multistep pathways involving inactivation of tumor suppressor proteins and activation of oncogenic peptides. Cancer cells can spread to other parts of the body through the lymphatic system or blood stream. Usually, cancer is classified according to the type of tissue or cell most prominently involved. As noted previously, proteasome inhibition has already been validated as a therapeutic strategy for the treatment of cancer, particularly multiple myeloma.
  • multiple myeloma cells possess both forms of the proteasome, although the ratio can vary somewhat.
  • Multiple myeloma is a hematologic disease characterized by an excessive number of abnormal plasma cells in the bone marrow. Plasma cells develop from B-cells, thus it is not surprising that other B-cell malignancies would also express immunoproteasome to some extent. Except for two chronic mylogenous leukemia cell lines, heme-related cancers (e.g., multiple myeloma, leukemias and lymphomas) generally appear to express immunoproteasome (Figure I). Cancer cells originating from lymphoid cells express 30% or more immunoproteasome.
  • the invention relates to a method for the treatment of cancer, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein.
  • the cancer is a heme-related disorder.
  • some cancers e.g., solid tumors, head and neck squamous cell carcinoma, cervical carcinoma and small cell lung carcinoma
  • appear to have down regulated immunoproteasome expression (Evans et al, J Immunol 167:5420, 2001; Meissner et al, Clin Cancer Res 11 :2552, 2005; Restifo et al, J Exp Med 177:265-272, 1993).
  • certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method of treating cancers comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of INF- ⁇ or TNF- ⁇ and a proteasome inhibitor compound disclosed herein.
  • Compounds prepared as described herein can be administered in various forms, depending on the disorder to be treated and the age, condition, and body weight of the patient, as is well known in the art.
  • the compounds may be formulated as tablets, capsules, granules, powders, or syrups; or for parenteral administration, they may be formulated as injections (intravenous, intramuscular, or subcutaneous), drop infusion preparations, or suppositories.
  • injections intravenous, intramuscular, or subcutaneous
  • drop infusion preparations or suppositories.
  • ophthalmic mucous membrane route they may be formulated as eye drops or eye ointments.
  • the active ingredient may be mixed with any conventional additive or excipient, such as a binder, a disintegrating agent, a lubricant, a corrigent, a solubilizing agent, a suspension aid, an emulsifying agent, a coating agent, a cyclodextrin, and/or a buffer.
  • a daily dosage of from 0.01 to 2000 mg of the compound is recommended for an adult human patient, and this may be administered in a single dose or in divided doses.
  • the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect.
  • the precise time of administration and/or amount of the composition that will yield the most effective results in terms of efficacy of treatment in a given patient will depend upon the activity, pharmacokinetics, and bioavailability of a particular compound, physiological condition of the patient (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, and type of medication), route of administration, etc.
  • physiological condition of the patient including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, and type of medication
  • route of administration etc.
  • the above guidelines can be used as the basis for fine-tuning the treatment, e.g., determining the optimum time and/or amount of administration, which will require no more than routine experimentation consisting of monitoring the subject and adjusting the dosage and/or timing.
  • phrases "pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer to those ligands, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition, or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material. Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose, and sucrose; (2) starches, such as com starch, potato starch, and substituted or unsubstituted ⁇ -cyclodextrin; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, com oil, and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laur
  • compositions of the present invention are non- pyrogenic, i.e., do not induce significant temperature elevations when administered to a patient.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of the inhibitor(s). These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the inhibitor(s), or by separately reacting a purified inhibitor(s) in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed.
  • Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, naphthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, laurylsulphonate salts, and amino acid salts, and the like.
  • sulfate bisulfate
  • phosphate nitrate
  • acetate valerate
  • oleate palmitate
  • stearate laurate
  • benzoate lactate
  • phosphate tosylate
  • citrate maleate
  • fumarate succinate
  • tartrate naphthylate
  • mesylate glucoheptonate
  • lactobionate lactobionate
  • laurylsulphonate salts
  • the inhibitors useful in the methods of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts with pharmaceutically acceptable bases.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic inorganic and organic base addition salts of an inhibitors). These salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the inhibitor(s), or by separately reacting the purified inhibitors) in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate, or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically acceptable organic primary, secondary, or tertiary amine.
  • Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts, and the like.
  • Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, and the like (see, for example, Berge et al., supra).
  • Wetting agents, emulsif ⁇ ers, and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
  • antioxidants examples include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite, and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite, and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT
  • Formulations suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or nonaqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert matrix, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouthwashes, and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of an inhibitors) as an active ingredient.
  • a composition may also be administered as a bolus, electuary, or paste.
  • the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, cyclodextrins, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose, and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar- agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as par
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols, and the like.
  • a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered inhibitors) moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • Tablets, -and other Solid dosage forms such as dragees, capsules, pills, and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical -formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes, and/or microspheres.
  • compositions may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use.
  • These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
  • embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • the active ingredient can also be in microencapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents, and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1 ,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols, and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents, and
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming, and preservative agents.
  • Suspensions in addition to the active inhibitor(s) may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar- agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
  • Formulations for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more inhibitor(s) with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active agent.
  • suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active agent.
  • Formulations which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams, or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of an inhibitor(s) include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches, and inhalants.
  • the active component may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
  • the ointments, pastes, creams, and gels may contain, in addition to inhibitor(s), excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc, and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc, and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to an inhibitor(s), excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates, and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
  • the inhibitor(s) can be alternatively administered by aerosol. This is accomplished by preparing an aqueous aerosol, liposomal preparation, or solid particles containing the composition.
  • a nonaqueous (e.g., fluorocarbon propellant) suspension could be used.
  • Sonic nebulizers are preferred because they minimize exposing the agent to shear, which can result in degradation of the compound.
  • an aqueous aerosol is made by formulating an aqueous solution or suspension of the agent together with conventional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and stabilizers.
  • the carriers and stabilizers vary with the requirements of the particular composition, but typically include nonionic surfactants (T weens, Pluronics, sorbitan esters, lecithin, Cremophors), pharmaceutically acceptable co-solvents such as polyethylene glycol, innocuous proteins like serum albumin, oleic acid, amino acids such as glycine, buffers, salts, sugars, or sugar alcohols.
  • Aerosols generally are prepared from isotonic solutions.
  • Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of an inhibitors) to the body.
  • dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the agent in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the inhibitor(s) across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the inhibitors) in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more inhibitors(s) in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
  • aqueous and nonaqueous carriers examples include water, ethanol, polyols
  • compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, and dispersing agents.
  • microorganisms Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include tonicity-adjusting agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
  • Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of inhibitor(s) in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue. The preparations of agents maybe given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are, of course, given by forms suitable for each administration route.
  • parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrastemal injection, and infusion.
  • systemic administration means the administration of a ligand, drug, or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
  • inhibitors(s) may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracistemally, and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
  • routes of administration including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracistemally, and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
  • the inhibitors which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
  • compositions of this invention may be provided in an aqueous solution containing about 0.1-10% w/v of a compound disclosed herein, among other substances, for parenteral administration. Typical dose ranges are from about 0.01 to about 50 mg/kg of body weight per day, given in 1-4 divided doses. Each divided dose may contain the same or different compounds of the invention.
  • the dosage will be an effective amount depending on several factors including the overall health of a patient, and the formulation and route of administration of the selected compound(s).
  • Another aspect of the invention provides a conjoint therapy wherein one or more other therapeutic agents are administered with the proteasome inhibitor.
  • Such conjoint treatment may be achieved by way of the simultaneous, sequential, or separate dosing of the individual components of the treatment.
  • a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with one or more other proteasome inhibitor(s).
  • a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with a chemotherapeutic.
  • Suitable chemotherapeutics may include, natural products such as vinca alkaloids (i.e. vinblastine, vincristine, and vinorelbine), paclitaxel, epidipodophyllotoxins (i.e.
  • antibiotics dactinomycin (actinomycin D) daunorubicin, doxorubicin and idarubicin
  • anthracyclines mitoxantrone, bleomycins, plicamycin (mithramycin) and mitomycin
  • enzymes L- asparaginase which systemically metabolizes L-asparagine and deprives cells which do not have the capacity to synthesize their own asparagine
  • antiplatelet agents antiproliferative/antimitotic alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustards (mechlorethamine, cyclophosphamide and analogs, melphalan, chlorambucil), ethylenimines and methylmelamines (hexamethylmelamine and thiotepa), alkyl sulfonates (busulfan), nitrosoureas (carmustine (BCNU) and analogs, streptozocin),
  • estrogen and hormone agonists such as leutinizing hormone releasing hormone (LHRH) agonists (goserelin, leuprolide and triptorelin).
  • LHRH leutinizing hormone releasing hormone
  • Other chemotherapeutic agents may include mechlorethamine, camptothecin, ifosfamide, tamoxifen, raloxifene, gemcitabine, navelbine, or any analog or derivative variant of the foregoing.
  • a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with a steroid.
  • Suitable steroids may include, but are not limited to, 21- acetoxypregnenolone, alclometasone, algestone, amcinonide, beclomethasone, betamethasone, budesonide, chloroprednisone, clobetasol, clocortolone, cloprednol, corticosterone, cortisone, cortivazol, deflazacort, desonide, desoximetasone, dexamethasone, diflorasone, diflucortolone, difuprednate, enoxolone, fluazacort, flucloronide, flumethasone, flunisolide, fluocinolone acetonide, fluocinonide, fluocortin butyl, fluocortolone, fluorometholone, fluperolone acetate, flupredni
  • a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with an immunotherapeutic agent.
  • Suitable immunotherapeutic agents may include, but are not limited to, cyclosporine, thalidomide, and monoclonal antibodies.
  • the monoclonal antibodies can be either naked or conjugated such as rituximab, tositumomab, alemtuzumab, epratuzumab, ibritumomab tiuxetan, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, bevacizumab, cetuximab, erlotinib and trastuzumab.
  • DCM diisopropylethylamine
  • Boc-Tyr(Me)-OBn (2 g, 5.2 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (15 mL) and cooled to 0 0 C followed by dropwise addition of TFA (15 mL). The reaction was allowed to warm to room temp and was stirred for 2 hours. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to yield (AAA) as a clear oil (1.4 g, 95% yield) which was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 286.42) and was used without further purification.
  • Example 18 Assays to Determine Inhibitory Preference There are three types of assays that can be utilized when determining whether or not a molecule preferentially inhibits the CT-L activity of the constitutive or immunoproteasome. Enzyme kinetic assays such as those disclosed in U.S. application serial number 09/569748, Example 2 and Stein et al., Biochem. (1996), 35, 3899-3908 use isolated 2OS proteasome preps with greater than 90% constitutive proteasome subunits or immunoproteasome subunits. The inhibitory preference of the molecule is then based on the EC 5 0 ratio of the chymotryptic-like activity of the constitutive proteasome to that of the immunoproteasome (2OS ratio).
  • the CT-L EC 50 of a compound can be determined using 26S proteasome in the context of a cell lysate.
  • Compound is added to iysate generated from cells that either predominantly express constitutive proteasome (e.g., HT29) or immunoproteasome (e.g., THPl). Again, the inhibitory preference is then based on the EC 50 ratio (Lysate ratio).
  • a more cell-based approach can be utilized.
  • Cells expressing approximately equivalent amounts of immuno- and constitutive proteasome e.g., RPMI-8226
  • test compound e.g., RPMI-8226
  • the ratio of the EC 50 generated in the ELISA-based assay using ⁇ 5 antibody and LMP7 antibodies provides the basis for determining the inhibitory preference of the test compound. In all instances, a ratio of one indicates that the molecule works equally well at inhibiting the CT-L activity of both forms of proteasome.
  • a ratio of less than one denotes the molecule inhibits the CT-L activity of the constitutive proteasome better than that of the immunoproteasome.
  • Ratios greater than one signifies the molecule inhibits chymotrypsin-like activity of the immunoproteasome better than that of the constitutive proteasome.
  • a suitable ELISA assay may be found in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 1 1/254541 , incorporated herein in its entirety. Briefly, RPMI-8226 cells were treated with 0.1 nM to 1 ⁇ M of proteasome Inhibitor B. The samples were then washed with phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) and lysed in hypotonic buffer (20 mM Tris pH 8, 5 mM EDTA) (Tris-HCl and EDTA are available from Teknova, Inc., Hollister, CA). Cellular debris was removed by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm in a micro fuge (4 °C) for 2 min.
  • PBS phosphate-buffered saline
  • hypotonic buffer 20 mM Tris pH 8, 5 mM EDTA
  • Tris-HCl and EDTA are available from Teknova, Inc., Hollister, CA. Cellular debris was removed by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm in
  • the supernatant was transferred to a fresh tube, snap frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at -80 0 C. After thawing on ice, the samples (30 ⁇ l for assays run in triplicate) were treated with 500 nM of Inhibitor A for 1 hr at room temperature.
  • the lysate was denatured by addition of seven volumes of 1% SDS (210 ⁇ l) (available from Bio-Rad, Hercules, CA) and heating at 99 °C with vigorous shaking for 5 min. The sample was allowed to cool and two volumes (60 ⁇ l) of 10% Triton X-100 (available from Bio-Rad, Hercules, CA) was added.
  • SDS 1% SDS
  • Triton X-100 available from Bio-Rad, Hercules, CA
  • Streptavidin sepharose beads (6.5 ⁇ l/well) (available from Amersham Biosciences, Piscataway, NJ), were washed three times with 1 ml PBS (available from Mediatech, Inc., Herndon, VA) in a microcentrifuge tube. The beads were resuspended in ELISA wash/block buffer (PBS + 0.1% Tween 20 + 1% bovine serum albumin; 20 ⁇ l/well) and transferred to the wells of a 96 well filter plate (BSA is available from Sigma, St. Louis, MO; Tween is available from Calbiochem, San Diego, CA).
  • ELISA wash/block buffer PBS + 0.1% Tween 20 + 1% bovine serum albumin; 20 ⁇ l/well
  • BSA is available from Sigma, St. Louis, MO
  • Tween is available from Calbiochem, San Diego, CA).
  • An exemplary feature of the ELISA-based PD assay is that it permits differentiation between constitutive proteasome inhibition ( ⁇ 5) and immunoproteasome inhibition (LMP7) because it utilizes subunit-specific antibodies.
  • Utilizing a different active site probe expands the utility of the ELISA-based assay for measuring the occupation of multiple constitutive ( ⁇ 5, ⁇ l, ⁇ 2) and immunoproteasome (LMP7, LMP2) active sites in 8226 multiple myeloma cell line that co-expresses both forms of proteasome.
  • the expanded active site assay can be used to measure relative inhibitor selectivity both between the immuno- and constitutive proteasomes as well as among the three active sites of each proteasome.
  • the ELISA-based assay is able to determine the potency and selectivity of other classes of proteasome inhibitors, including the peptide boronic acid-based inhibitors.
  • Inhibitor C To conduct a pharmacodynamic evaluation of an inhibitor, whole blood and
  • PBMC samples are collected prior to dosing and at multiple time-points after dosing. Lysates are prepared and protein concentration assays performed to normalize for total protein in each lysate. The level of inhibitor binding to ⁇ 5 and LMP7 subunits in whole blood and PBMCRPMI-8226 cells, respectively, is determined by the streptavi din-capture ELlSA described above. Standard curves with purified constitutive proteasome and immunoproteasome are utilized to ensure assay linearity/dynamic range and to convert the chemiluminescence signal to an absolute amount ( ⁇ g) of subunit bound.
  • the ratio of the EC50 generated in the ELISA-based assay using ⁇ 5 antibody and LMP7 antibodies provides the basis for determining the inhibitory preference of the test compound.
  • the above inhibitor (B) has a ratio greater than 20, thus, it is much more selective at inhibiting the chymotryptic-like activity associated with the immunoproteasome.
  • the amount of ⁇ 5 or LMP7 detected in the post-dose sample is compared to the pre-dose sample.
  • Proteasome inhibition is determined after a single dose or after a cycle of dosing, or is used to monitor inhibition shortly after dosing as well as to monitor recovery of proteasome activity after a course of dosing.
  • Administration of 6 mg/kg of Compound 14 reduced disease severity by ⁇ 50% while the 20 mg/kg dose level inhibited the disease by greater than 75%.
  • the effect administration of Compound 14 on disease progress was also assessed in an alternative mouse model for RA, in which disease develops 21 — 30 days after immunization with bovine type II collagen (Kagari et al., J Immunol 169:1459- 1466, 2002).

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)

Abstract

One aspect of the invention relates to inhibitors that preferentially inhibit immunoproteasome activity over constitutive proteasome activity. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to the treatment of immune related diseases, comprising administering a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to the treatment of cancer, comprising administering a compound of the invention.

Description

COMPOUNDS FOR ENZYME INHIBITION Background of the Invention
In eukaryotes, protein degradation is predominately mediated through the ubiquitin pathway in which proteins targeted for destruction are ligated to the 76 amino acid polypeptide ubiquitin. Once targeted, ubiquitinated proteins then serve as substrates for the 26S proteasome, a multicatalytic protease, which cleaves proteins into short peptides through the action of its three major proteolytic activities. While having a general function in intracellular protein turnover, proteasome-mediated degradation also plays a key role in many processes such as major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I presentation, apoptosis and cell viability, antigen processing, NF-κB activation, and transduction of pro-inflammatory signals.
The 20S proteasome is a 700 kDa cylindrical-shaped multicatalytic protease complex comprised of 28 subunits, classified as α- and β-type, that are arranged in 4 stacked heptameric rings. In yeast and other eukaryotes, 7 different α subunits form the outer rings and 7 different β subunits comprise the inner rings. The α subunits serve as binding sites for the 19S (PA700) and 1 1 S (PA28) regulatory complexes, as well as a physical barrier for the inner proteolytic chamber formed by the two β subunit rings. Thus, in vivo, the proteasome is believed to exist as a 26S particle ("the 26S proteasome")- In vivo experiments have shown that inhibition of the 2OS form of the proteasome can be readily correlated to inhibition of 26S proteasome.
Cleavage of amino-terminal prosequences of β subunits during particle formation expose amino-terminal threonine residues, which serve as the catalytic nucleophiles. The subunits responsible for catalytic activity in proteasome thus possess an amino terminal nucleophilic residue, and these subunits belong to the family of N- terminal nucleophile (Ntn) hydrolases (where the nucleophilic N-terminal residue is, for example, Cys, Ser, Thr, and other nucleophilic moieties). This family includes, for example, penicillin G acylase (PGA), penicillin V acylase (PVA), glutamine PRPP amidotransferase (GAT), and bacterial glycosylasparaginase. In addition to the ubiquitously expressed β subunits, higher vertebrates also possess three interferon- γ- inducible β subunits (LMP7, LMP2 and MECLl), which replace their normal counterparts, β5, βl and β2, respectively. When all three IFN- γ-inducible subunits are present, the proteasome is referred to as an "immunoproteasome". Thus, eukaryotic cells can possess two forms of proteasomes in varying ratios.
Through the use of different peptide substrates, three major proteolytic activities have been defined for the eukaryote 2OS proteasomes: chymotrypsin-like activity (CT- L), which cleaves after large hydrophobic residues; trypsin-like activity (T-L), which cleaves after basic residues; and peptidylglutamyl peptide hydrolyzing activity (PGPH), which cleaves after acidic residues. Two additional less characterized activities have also been ascribed to the proteasome: BrAAP activity, which cleaves after branched- chain amino acids; and SNAAP activity, which cleaves after small neutral amino acids. Although both forms of the proteasome possess all five enzymatic activities, differences in the extent of the activities between the forms have been described based on specific substrates. For both forms of the proteasome, the major proteasome proteolytic activities appear to be contributed by different catalytic sites within the 2OS core. There are several examples of small molecules which have been used to inhibit proteasome activity; however, these compounds generally lack the specificity to delineate between the two forms of the proteasome. Thus, the ability to explore and exploit the roles of each specific proteasome form at the cellular and molecular level has not been possible. Therefore, the creation of small molecule inhibitors) that preferentially inhibit a single form of the proteasome is needed to allow the exploration of the roles of each proteasome form at the cellular and molecular level.
Summary of the Invention
One aspect of the invention relates to inhibitors that preferentially inhibit immunoproteasome activity over constitutive proteasome activity. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to the treatment of immune related diseases, comprising administering a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to the treatment of cancer, comprising administering a compound of the invention.
One aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
Figure imgf000004_0001
(I) wherein each Ar is independently an aromatic or heteroaromatic group optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents; each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z; B is absent or is N(R9)R10, preferably absent;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O; M is absent or is C|.i2alkyl, preferably
Figure imgf000004_0002
Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci^alkyl;
X is selected from O, S, NH, and
Figure imgf000004_0003
preferably O;
Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci^alkyl, preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
R1 is selected from H, -Ci-δalkyl-B,
Figure imgf000004_0004
Ci-βalkoxyalkyl, aryl, and C|-6aralkyl;
R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci-βaralkyl, heteroaryl, and C|-6heteroaralkyl;
R4 is N(R5)L-Q-R6;
R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci^alkyl, preferably hydrogen;
R R66 is selected from hydrogen, Ci.6alkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl, Ci-6aralkyl, heteroaryl, CI-6heteroaralkyl, R11ZAZ-C, -galkyl-, R14Z-C1-8alkyl-, (R11O)(R 12O)P(=O)O-C, -8alkyl- ZAZ-C, -8alkyl-, R1 'ZAZ-Ci-galkyl-ZAZ-Ci-galkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-galkyl-, (R1 1O)(R12O)P(=O)O-CI-8alkyl-, (RI3)2N-CM2alkyl-, (R'^N÷-C.-ualkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2Ci-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group; or
Rs and R6 together are
Figure imgf000005_0001
d.βalkyl-ZAZ-Ci-ealkyl, ZAZ-Ci- 6alkyl-ZAZ-Ci-6alkyl, ZAZ-C
Figure imgf000005_0002
thereby forming a ring;
R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000005_0003
and Cuβaralkyl, preferably hydrogen; R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Ci-ήalkyl, preferably Ci^alkyl; and
R10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
R11 and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Ci^alkyl, Ci-^alkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci-earalkyl, and C|.6heteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and
Figure imgf000005_0004
thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and
Figure imgf000005_0005
preferably Q- βalkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen, C|.6alkyl, Ci^alkenyl, Ci-δalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci-earalkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl; R15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, C|.6hydroxyalkyl, d-ealkoxy,
-C(O)OC i-6alkyl, -C(O)NHC ι-6alkyl, and C|-6aralkyl; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond.
Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
Figure imgf000005_0006
(II) each Ar is independently an aromatic or heteroaromatic group optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents; each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z; B is absent or is N(R9)R10, preferably absent;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O; M is absent or is Ci-i2alkyl, preferably Ci-salkyl; Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-C|_6alkyl; X is selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci-βalkyl, preferably O; Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and
Figure imgf000006_0001
preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, and C i -6heteroaralkyl;
R4 is N(RS)L-Q-R6;
R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH,
Figure imgf000006_0002
preferably hydrogen;
R6 is selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, Ci^alkenyl, Ci^alkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, C-eheteroaralkyl, R1 1ZAZ-C, -8alkyl-, R14Z-C,-8alkyl-, (R"θ)(R12O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl- ZAZ-C i-8alkyl-, R1 ' ZAZ-C ι-8alkyl-Z AZ-C 1-8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Csalkyl-, (R"θ)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-, (Rl 3)2N-CM2alkyl-, (Rl 3)3N+-CM2alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclyl M-, R14SO2C|-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group; or
R5 and R6 together are Ci.6alkyl-Y-C|-6alkyl, Ci-6alkyl-ZAZ-C,-6alkyl, ZAZ-Ci- 6alkyl-ZAZ-C|.6alkyl, ZAZ-C|-6alkyl-ZAZ, or d^alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring;
R8 is selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000006_0003
preferably hydrogen; R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Cβalkyl, preferably
Figure imgf000007_0001
and R10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
R and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Chalky!, Ci-6alkenyl,
Figure imgf000007_0002
aryl, heteroaryl, Cj-όaralkyl, and Ci-όheteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and C^alkyl, or R11 and R12 together are Ci^alkyl, thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and C^alkyl, preferably Ci- 6alkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, Ci^alkenyl, Ci.6alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci^heteroaralkyl;
R15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-όalkyi, C-βhydroxyalkyl, C|-6alkoxy, -C(O)OC, ^alkyl, -C(O)NHC, -6alkyl, and C,-6aralkyl; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond. Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (III) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
R1 R7 O R3
O R2 R8 (III) wherein each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or
A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
B is absent or is N(R9)R10, preferably absent;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O;
M is absent or is C|.|2alkyl, preferably C,.galkyl; W is selected from -CHO and -B(OR1 ')2;
Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci-βalkyl; Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci-6alkyl, preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A; R1 is selected from H,
Figure imgf000008_0001
aryl, and
C|-6aralkyl;
R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci-βaralkyl, heteroaryl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl;
R4 is N(R5)L-Q-R6; R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, C|_6aralkyl, and Ci^alkyl, preferably hydrogen;
R6 is selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000008_0002
Ci-βalkenyl, Ci.6alkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, Ci-βheteroaralkyl, RπZAZ-Cι-8alkyl-, Rl4Z-Cι-8alkyl-, (R] 1O)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl- ZAZ-Ci-8alkyl-, R1 'ZAZ-Csalkyl-ZAZ-Ci-salkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Cugalkyl-, (R10)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-, (R13)2N-CI-12alkyl-, (Rl3)3N+-C,-12alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2Ci-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group; or
R5 and R6 together are Ci-6alkyl-Y-Ci-6alkyl, Ci-6alkyl-ZAZ-Ci.6alkyl, ZAZ-Ci- 6alkyl-ZAZ-C|_6alkyl, ZAZ-Ci-βalkyl-ZAZ, or C^alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring;
R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-6alkyl, and
Figure imgf000008_0003
preferably hydrogen;
R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Q-βalkyl, preferably C|-6alkyl; and R10 is an N-terminal protecting group; R1 ' and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation,
Figure imgf000008_0004
Ci-βalkenyl, C|.6alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000008_0005
and Cuβheteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and C|.6alkyl, or R1 ' and R12 together are Cι-6alkyl, thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and Ci-βalkyl, preferably Q- βalkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000009_0001
Ci-βalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000009_0002
each R16 is independently selected from hydrogen and Ci^alkyl; or two occurrences of R1 ! together may be
Figure imgf000009_0003
thereby forming a ring together with the intervening boron and oxygen atoms to which they are attached; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond. Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (IV) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
Figure imgf000009_0004
(IV) wherein each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or
A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O;
M is absent or is C|.|2alkyl, preferably C|.galkyl;
W is selected from -CHO and -B(OR1 ')2; Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci^alkyl;
Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and
Figure imgf000009_0005
preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A; R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, C|.6aralkyl, heteroaryl, and
C i -βheteroaral kyl ; R4 is N(R5)L-Q-R6;
R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, C|.6aralkyl, and
Figure imgf000010_0001
preferably hydrogen;
R6 is selected from hydrogen, Chalky), Ci-βalkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl,
Figure imgf000010_0002
heteroaryl, C1-6heteroaralkyl, R " ZAZ-C1 -8alkyl-, R14Z-C,-8alkyl-, (RπO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,.8alkyl- ZAZ-C,-8alkyl-, R11Z AZ-C, -8alkyl-Z AZ-C, -8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-d-salkyl-, (R10)(R12O)P(=O)O-Cl-8alkyl-, (R'^N-C^alkyl-, (R13)3N+-C1-I2alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2Ci-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group; or
R5 and R6 together are d-ealkyl-Y-d-ealkyl, Ci-όalkyl-ZAZ-Ci-ealkyl, ZAZ-C,. 6alkyl-ZAZ-C|.6alkyl, ZAZ-C i^alkyl-ZAZ, or C-βalkyl-A, thereby forming a ring;
R8 is selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000010_0003
and
Figure imgf000010_0004
preferably hydrogen; R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and C,-6alkyl, preferably
Figure imgf000010_0005
and R10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
R11 and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, C^alkyl, Ci-βalkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C,.6aralkyl, and C|.6heteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and C|.6alkyl, or R1 ' and R12 together are Ci-6alkyl, thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and
Figure imgf000010_0006
preferably C,.
6alkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen, C|.6alkyl, Ci^alkenyl, Ci^alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci-δheteroaralkyl; each R16 is independently selected from hydrogen and Ci^alkyl; or two occurrences of R1 ' together may be C-βalkyl, thereby forming a ring together with the intervening boron and oxygen atoms to which they are attached; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond. Brief Description of the Figures
Figure 1 shows the immunoproteasome expression level of certain cell lines and patient samples, including multiple myeloma, leukemias, lymphomas, and solid tumors.
Figure 2A shows the effect of Compound 14 on disease progression in mouse models of rheumatoid arthritis (RA) where dosing began when animals first showed signs of disease (indicated by arrows) and data shown is average disease score (± SEM; N = 7/group) and is representative of three independent experiments.
Figure 2B shows the effect of Compound 14 on disease progression in mouse models of RA where RA was induced on Day 0 in female DBA/1 mice by immunization with bovine type II collagen in CFA where dosing began when animals first showed signs of disease (indicated by arrows) and data shown is average disease score (± SEM; N = 10/group).
Detailed Description of the Invention
The invention involves compounds useful as enzyme inhibitors. These compounds are generally useful to inhibit enzymes having a nucleophilic group at the
N-terminus. For example, activities of enzymes or enzyme subunits having N-terminal amino acids with nucleophiles in their side chains, such as threonine, serine, or cysteine can be successfully inhibited by the enzyme inhibitors described herein. Activities of enzymes or enzyme subunits having non-amino acid nucleophilic groups at their N- termini, such as, for example, protecting groups or carbohydrates, can also be successfully inhibited by the enzyme inhibitors described herein.
While not bound by any particular theory of operation, it is believed that such N-terminal nucleophiles of Ntn form covalent adducts with the epoxide, aziridine, aldehyde, or borate functional group of the enzyme inhibitors described herein. For example, in the β5/Pre2 subunit of 2OS proteasome, the N-terminal threonine is believed to irreversibly form a morpholino or piperazino adduct upon reaction with a peptide epoxide or aziridine such as those described below. Such adduct formation would involve ring-opening cleavage of the epoxide or aziridine.
Regarding the stereochemistry, the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog rules for determining absolute stereochemistry are followed. These rules are described, for example, in Organic Chemistry, Fox and Whitesell; Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Boston, MA (1994); Section 5-6, pp 177-178, which section is hereby incorporated by reference. Peptides can have a repeating backbone structure with side chains extending from the backbone units. Generally, each backbone unit has a side chain associated with it, although in some cases, the side chain is a hydrogen atom. In other embodiments, not every backbone unit has an associated side chain. Peptides useful in peptide epoxides or peptide aziridines have two or more backbone units. In some embodiments useful for inhibiting chymotrypsin-like (CT-L) activity of the proteasome, between two and eight backbone units are present, and in some preferred embodiments for CT-L inhibition, between two and six backbone units are present. The side chains extending from the backbone units can include natural aliphatic or aromatic amino acid side chains, such as hydrogen (glycine), methyl (alanine), isopropyl (valine), sec-butyl (isoleucine), isobutyl (leucine), phenylmethyl (phenylalanine), and the side chain constituting the amino acid proline. The side chains can also be other branched or unbranched aliphatic or aromatic groups such as ethyl, n- propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, and aryl substituted derivatives such as 1 -phenyl ethyl, 2- phenylethyl, (l-naphthyl)methyl, (2-naphthyl)methyl, l-(l-naphthyl)ethyl, l-(2- naphthyl)ethyl, 2-(l-naphthyl)ethyl, 2-(2-naphthyl)ethyl, and similar compounds. The aryl groups can be further substituted with branched or unbranched Cl-6alkyl groups, or substituted alkyl groups, acetyl and the like, or further aryl groups, or substituted aryl groups, such as benzoyl and the like. Heteroaryl groups can also be used as side chain substituents. Heteroaryl groups include nitrogen-, oxygen-, and sulfur-containing aryl groups such as thienyl, benzothienyl, naphthothienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, indolyl, purinyl, quinolyl, and the like. In some embodiments, polar or charged residues can be introduced into the peptide epoxides or peptide aziridines. For example, naturally occurring amino acids such as hydroxy-containing (Thr, Tyr, Ser) or sulfur-containing (Met, Cys) can be introduced, as well as non-essential amino acids, for example, taurine, carnitine, citrulline, cystine, ornithine, norleucine and others. Non-naturally occurring side chain substituents with charged or polar moieties can also be included, such as, for example, Cl -6alkyl chains or C6- 12aryl groups with one or more hydroxy, short chain alkoxy, sulfide, thio, carboxyl, ester, phospho, amido or amino groups, or such substituents substituted with one or more halogen atoms. In some preferred embodiments, there is at least one aryl group present in a side chain of the peptide moiety.
In some embodiments, the backbone units are amide units [-NH-CHR-C(=O)-], in which R is the side chain. Such a designation does not exclude the naturally occurring amino acid proline, or other non-naturally occurring cyclic secondary amino acids, which will be recognized by those of skill in the art.
In other embodiments, the backbone units are N-alkylated amide units (for example, N-methyl and the like), olefϊnic analogs (in which one or more amide bonds are replaced by olefinic bonds), tetrazole analogs (in which a tetrazole ring imposes a cis-configuration on the backbone), or combinations of such backbone linkages. In still other embodiments, the amino acid α-carbon is modified by α-alkyl substitution, for example, aminoisobutyric acid. In some further embodiments, side chains are locally modified, for example, by ΔE or ΔZ dehydro modification, in which a double bond is present between the α and β atoms of the side chain, or for example by ΔE or ΔZ cyclopropyl modification, in which a cyclopropyl group is present between the α and β atoms of the side chain. In still further embodiments employing amino acid groups, D- amino acids can be used. Further embodiments can include side chain-to-backbone cyclization, disulfide bond formation, lactam formation, azo linkage, and other modifications discussed in "Peptides and Mimics, Design of Conformationally Constrained" by Hruby and Boteju, in "Molecular Biology and Biotechnology: A
Comprehensive Desk Reference", ed. Robert A. Meyers, VCH Publishers (1995), pp. 658-664, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
One aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
Figure imgf000013_0001
(I) wherein each Ar is independently an aromatic or heteroaromatic group optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents; each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z; B is absent or is N(R9)R10, preferably absent;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O; M is absent or is
Figure imgf000014_0001
preferably Ci-βalkyl; Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci-βalkyl; X is selected from O, S, NH, and N-Q^alkyl, preferably O; Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci^alkyl, preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
R1 is selected from H, -Q-βalkyl-B,
Figure imgf000014_0002
Ci-δalkoxyalkyi, aryl, and
Figure imgf000014_0003
R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci-βaralkyl, heteroaryl, and Ci-ftheteroaralkyl;
R4 is N(RS)L-Q-R6;
R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, Ci-βaralkyl, and
Figure imgf000014_0004
preferably hydrogen;
R6 is selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000014_0005
Ci-βalkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl,
Figure imgf000014_0006
heteroaryl, C|-6heteroaralkyl, R1 1ZAZ-Ci. galkyl-, Rl4Z-C|-galkyl-, (R 1 1O)(R l2O)P(=O)O-Ci -8alkyl- ZAZ-C1.8alkyl-, R1 'ZAZ-Ci-8alkyl-ZAZ-C|-8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-d-galkyl-, (RnO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-Cl-8alkyl-,
Figure imgf000014_0007
(Rl 3)3N+-CM2alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2Cι-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group, more preferably t-butoxycarbonyl or benzyloxycarbonyl; or R5 and R6 together are
Figure imgf000015_0001
ZAZ-Ci- 6alkyl-ZAZ-C|-6alkyl, ZAZ-Ci-6alkyl-ZAZ, or Ci^alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring;
R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, and Ci^aralkyl, preferably hydrogen; R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Ci-βalkyl, preferably Ci^alkyl; and
R10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
R11 and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, C|.βalkyl, C|.6alkenyl, Ci^alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci-όaralkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and
Figure imgf000015_0002
thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and Ci^alkyl, preferably Ci- βalkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000015_0003
Ci-βalkenyl, Cuβalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci-βaralkyl, and
Figure imgf000015_0004
R15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-βalkyl, Ci^hydroxyalkyl, Ci-βalkoxy,
-C(O)OCi-6alkyl, -C(O)NHC ι-6alkyl, and Ci-6aralkyl, preferably Ci-6alkyl and CN όhydroxyalkyl, more preferably methyl, ethyl, hydroxymethyl, and 2-hydroxyethyl; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, R1 is selected from -Ci-βalkyl-B and Ci-βaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci- 6alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain preferred such embodiments, R1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from carboxylic acid and ester. In certain embodiments, R1 is selected from methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, carboxymethyl, and benzyl. In certain embodiments R1 is -C|-6alkyl-B and C|.6aralkyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, B is absent.
In certain embodiments, R2 is selected from Ci-βaralkyl and C|.6heteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from Ci-βalkyl-phenyl, Ci-βalkyl-thienyl, Ci-βalkyl-thiazolyl, and d-όalkyl-isothiazolyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci-6alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyario. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from Ci-βalkyl- phenyl and
Figure imgf000016_0001
In certain preferred such embodiments, R2 is selected
Figure imgf000016_0002
R = H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu', OH, CN, CF3 and CH3. In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 and CH3.
In certain preferred such embodiments where D is attached to a six-membered ring, D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
In certain embodiments, R is selected from Ci^aralkyl and Ci-όheteroaralkyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including
Figure imgf000016_0003
ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R3 is selected from C i^alkyl -phenyl and Ci-βalkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R3 is selected from
Figure imgf000017_0001
R = H, any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu1, OH, CN, CF3 or CH3. In certain embodiments, D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 or CH3.
In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, R6 is Ar-Y-, and each Ar is independently selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like. In certain such embodiments, Ar maybe substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Q- βalkyl. In certain other such embodiments where Q is C^a-kyl, Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl.
In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, Q is absent, L is C=O or SO2, and R6 is selected from Ar-Y and heterocyclyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl. In certain other preferred such embodiments, Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is C|.6alkenyl, where
Figure imgf000017_0002
is a substituted vinyl group where the substiruent is preferably an aryl or heteroaryl group, more preferably a phenyl group optionally substituted with one to four substituents.
In certain embodiments, L and Q are absent and R6 is selected from
Figure imgf000017_0003
Ci-βalkenyl, d-βalkynyl,
Figure imgf000017_0004
and Ci-όheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R5 is Ci^alkyl and R6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phenylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl. In other embodiments, L is SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from
Figure imgf000017_0005
and aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from methyl and phenyl. In certain embodiments, L is C=O and R6 is selected from Ci^alkyl, Ci- δalkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, Ci^heteroaralkyl, RnZA-C|.8alkyl-, R14Z-Ci-galkyl-, (R11O)(R l2O)P(=O)O-C1-8alkyl-, (R1 10)(R12O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl- ZAZ-Ci-8alkyl-, (R1 lO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-Cl-8alkyl-Z-Ci-8alkyl-J R1 ' ZA-Ci -8alkyl-ZAZ- C1-8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-C, .8alkyl-, (R13J2N-C, -8alkyl-} (Rl3)3N+-C,-8alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2Ci-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH-, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is H.
In certain embodiments, R5 is
Figure imgf000018_0001
R6 is Ci-βalkyl, Q is absent, and L is C=O. In certain such embodiments, R6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfonyl)ethyl.
In other embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is Ci-βaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, R5 is Ci^alkyl, and R6 is aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from heteroaryl and Ci-όheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine. In certain alternative such embodiments, R6 is Ci-βheteroaralkyl selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent or O, and R6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Co-ialkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl.
In certain embodiments, L and A are C=O, Q is absent, Z is O, M is C|-8alkyl, preferably methylene, and R6 is selected from R"ZA-Ci-8alkyl-, Rl4Z-C|-8alkyl-, R1 1ZA-C, .galkyl-ZAZ-Cgalkyl-, (R1 lO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-galky!-ZAZ-C|-8alkyl-,
(R1 1O)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-Cl -8alkyl-Z-C,-8alkyl-, and heterocyclylMZAZ-C^alkyl-, wherein each occurrence of A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain such embodiments, R6 is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-galkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(R16)(R17), wherein R16 and R17 together are
Figure imgf000019_0001
preferably C1.3alkyl-Y-C1.3a.kyl, thereby forming a ring. In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, M is
Figure imgf000019_0002
and R6 is selected from (RnO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,.8alkyl-, (R13)2NC,.8alkyl, (RI3)3N+C,.8alkyl-, and heterocyclyl-M-. In certain such embodiments, R6 is (R13)2NC|.8alkyl or (RI3)3N+C|.8alkyl-, where R13 is
Figure imgf000019_0003
In certain other such embodiments, R6 is heterocyclylM-, where heterocyclyl is selected from morpholino, piperidino, piperazino, and pyrrolidine
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is selected from Ci^alkyl, cycloalkyl-M, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is
Figure imgf000019_0004
Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is Cuβalkyl, where
Figure imgf000019_0005
is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl. In further embodiments, L is
Figure imgf000019_0006
Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is Ci- βaralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci- βalkyl, Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is Ci-βheteroaralkyl, where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyridyl)methyl .
In certain embodiments, L is absent or is C=O, and R5 and R6 together are Ci- 6alkyl-Y-Ci.6alkyl, Ci^alkyl-ZA-Ci^alkyl, or C|-6alkyl-A, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond, thereby forming a ring. In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q and Y are absent, and R5 and R6 together are Ci- 3alkyl-Y-C|.3alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and Q are absent, and R5 and R6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Cioalkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Q is absent, Y is selected from NH and N-Ci-6alkyl, and R5 and R6 together are Ci-3alkyl-Y- In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Y is absent, and R5 and R6 together are
Figure imgf000019_0007
In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O, and R5 and R6 together are Cι-2alkyl-ZA-Ci-2alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O and R5 and R6 together are C2OaIkVl-A. In certain embodiments, R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen and Ci-βalkyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen and methyl. In more preferred such embodiments, R7 and R8 are both hydrogen.
In certain embodiments, X is O, R2 and R3 are each independently Ci-βaralkyl, and R1 is selected from
Figure imgf000020_0001
aryl, and Ci- βaralkyl, any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including C^alkyl ester, Cj.salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether substituents.
Suitable N-terminal protecting groups known in the art of peptide syntheses, include t-butoxy carbonyl (Boc), benzoyl (Bz), fluoren-9-ylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), triphenylmethyl (trityl) and trichloroethoxycarbonyl (Troc) and the like. The use of various N-protecting groups, e.g., the benzyloxy carbonyl group or the t- butyloxycarbonyl group (Boc), various coupling reagents, e.g., dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), 1 ,3-diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC), l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC), N-hydroxyazabenzotriazole (HATU), carbonyldiimidazole, or 1-hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate (HOBT), and various cleavage conditions: for example, trifluoracetic acid (TFA), HCl in dioxane, hydrogenation on Pd-C in organic solvents (such as methanol or ethyl acetate), boron tris(trifluoroacetate), and cyanogen bromide, and reaction in solution with isolation and purification of intermediates are well-known in the art of peptide synthesis, and are equally applicable to the preparation of the subject compounds. Suitable protecting N- terminal protecting groups may also be found, for example, in Greene, T.W.; Wuts, P.G.M. "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", 3rd ed.; Wiley: New York, 1999 or Kocieήski, P. J., "Protecting Groups", Georg Thieme Verlag, 1994.
In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R1, R2, or R3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R1, R2, and R3 respectively is D. In certain preferred such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R1 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R2 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R3 is D. In certain embodiments the stereochemical configuration of at least two of the carbons bearing R1, R2, and R3 respectively is D. In yet another preferred embodiment, the stereochemical configuration of all three of the carbons bearing R1, R2, and R3 respectively is D.
Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (II) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
Figure imgf000021_0001
each Ar is independently an aromatic or heteroaromatic group optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents; each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
B is absent or is N(R9)R10, preferably absent;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O;
M is absent or is
Figure imgf000021_0002
preferably Ci-βalkyl;
Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-C|.6alkyl; X is selected from O, S, NH, and N-C|-6alkyl, preferably O;
Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci-βalkyl, preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A; R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci-βaralkyl, heteroaryl, and
C 1 -βheteroaralkyl;
R4 is N(R5)L-Q-R6;
R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, C|.6aralkyl, and
Figure imgf000021_0003
preferably hydrogen; R6 is selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000022_0001
Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, C^heteroaralkyl, R"ZAZ-C1-8alkyl-, Rl4Z-Ci-8alkyl-, (RπO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl- ZAZ-C1-8alkyl-, R1 'ZAZ-Ci-8alkyl-ZAZ-C,-8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl-, (R1 lO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-, (R'^N-C-nalkyl-, (Rl 3)3N+-C,-12alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, R14Sθ2Ct-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group, more preferably t-butoxycarbonyl or benzyloxycarbonyl; or
R5 and R6 together are Ci-όalkyl-Y-d-όalkyl, Ci-6alkyl-ZAZ-Ci-6alkyl, ZAZ-Ci-
Figure imgf000022_0002
ZAZ-C i-ealkyl-ZAZ, or Ci-6alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring; R8 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-βalkyl, and
Figure imgf000022_0003
preferably hydrogen;
R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and
Figure imgf000022_0004
preferably C|.6alkyl; and R10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
R1 ' and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Chalky!, Ci-^alkenyl, Ci^alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and
Figure imgf000022_0006
or R1 ' and R12 together are
Figure imgf000022_0005
thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and
Figure imgf000022_0007
preferably Ci- βalkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, C^alkenyl, C|-6alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl;
R15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, Ci^hydroxyalkyl, Ci^alkoxy, -C(O)OCi .ealkyl, -C(O)NHC ι-6alkyl, and d-6aralkyl, preferably C|.6alkyl and Ci- 6hydroxyalkyl, more preferably methyl, ethyl, hydroxymethyl, and 2-hydroxyethyl; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond.
In certain embodiments, R2 is selected from Ci.βaralkyl and Ci-eheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000022_0008
Figure imgf000022_0009
and
Figure imgf000022_0010
wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from Ci^alkyl- phenyl and Ci-βalkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000023_0001
R
R = H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu1, OH, CN, CF3 and CH3. In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 and CH3. In certain preferred such embodiments where D is attached to a six-membered ring, D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
In certain embodiments, R3 is selected from Ci-βaralkyl and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In certain the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci-όalkyi ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R3 is selected from C i^alkyl -phenyl and Ci^alkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R3 is selected from
Figure imgf000024_0001
R = H, any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu', OH, CN, CF3 or CH3. In certain embodiments, D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 or CH3.
In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, R6 is Ar-Y-, and each Ar is independently selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like. In certain such embodiments, Ar may be substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Ci- 6alkyl. In certain other such embodiments where Q is Ci-βalkyl, Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl. In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, Q is absent, L is C=O or SO2, and R6 is selected from Ar-Y and heterocyclyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl. In certain other preferred such embodiments, Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like. In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is
C|.6alkenyl, where
Figure imgf000024_0002
is a substituted vinyl group where the substituent is preferably an aryl or heteroaryl group, more preferably a phenyl group optionally substituted with one to four substituents.
In certain embodiments, L and Q are absent and R6 is selected from Chalky., Ci-6alkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, Ci.6ara.kyl, and C|.6heteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R5 is Ci^alkyl and R6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phcnylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl.
In other embodiments, L is SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from
Figure imgf000024_0003
and aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from methyl and phenyl. In certain embodiments, L is C=O and R6 is selected from Ci-βalkyl, C|.
6alkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, aryl, C|.6aralkyl, heteroaryl, Ci^heteroaralkyl, RnZA-C|-8alkyl-, Rl4Z-C,.8alkyl-, (R"θ)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-Ci.8alkyl-, (R"O)(R12O)P(=O)O-C|-8alkyl- ZAZ-Cgalkyl-, (R1 1O)(R12O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-Z-Ci.8alkyl-, R1 1ZA-C,-8alkyl-ZAZ- C,.8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Cgalkyl-, (Rl3)2N-Ci-8alkyl-3 (R13)3N+-C|-8alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2Ci-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH-, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is H.
In certain embodiments, R5 is
Figure imgf000025_0001
R6 is C-βalkyl, Q is absent, and L is C=O. In certain such embodiments, R6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfonyl)ethyl .
In other embodiments, L is
Figure imgf000025_0002
In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl.
In other embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, R5 is
Figure imgf000025_0003
and R6 is aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from heteroaryl and
Figure imgf000025_0004
In certain such embodiments, R6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine. In certain alternative such embodiments, R6 is Ci-βheteroaralkyl selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent or O, and R6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Co-ialkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl. In certain embodiments, L and A are C=O, Q is absent, Z is O, M is C|-8alkyl, preferably methylene, and R6 is selected from R1 1ZA-C i-8alkyl-, Rl4Z-Ci-8alkyl-, R1 1ZA-C, .salkyl-ZAZ-Cgalkyl-, (R10)(R12O)P(=O)O-C1-8alkyl-ZAZ-C,-8alkyl-, (R1 1O)(R12O)PC=O)O-C, -8alkyl-Z-Cl-8alkyl-, and heterocyclylMZAZ-Csalkyl-, wherein each occurrence of A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain such embodiments, R6 is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(R16)(R'.7), wherein R16 and R17 together are
Figure imgf000026_0001
preferably
Figure imgf000026_0002
thereby forming a ring.
In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, M is Ci-galkyl, and R6 is selected from (RπO)(R12O)P(=O)O-Ci-8alkyl-, (R13^NC, _8alkyl, (Rl3)3N+C,-8alkyl-, and heterocyclyl-M-. In certain such embodiments, R6 is (Rl3)2NC|.8alkyl or
(R 13J3N+C i .galkyl-, where R13 is Ci^alkyl. In certain other such embodiments, R6 is heterocyclylM-, where heterocyclyl is selected from morpholino, piperidino, piperazino, and pyrrolidino.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is selected from Ci^alkyl, cycloalkyl-M, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is Ci-βalkyl, where Ci-βalkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl. In further embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is Ci- βaralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci- βalkyl, Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is Ci-βheteroaralkyl, where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyri d yl)methyl .
In certain embodiments, L is absent or is C=O, and R5 and R6 together are Ci- 6alkyl-Y-C|.6alkyl,
Figure imgf000026_0003
wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond, thereby forming a ring. In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q and Y are absent, and R5 and R6 together are Ci. 3alkyl-Y-Ci.3alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and Q are absent, and R5 and R6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Cioalkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Q is absent, Y is selected from NH and N-Ci-βalkyl, and R5 and R6 together are Ci^alkyl-Y- C1.3a.kyl. In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Y is absent, and R5 and R6 together are C|-3alkyl-Y-Ci.3alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O, and R5 and R6 together are C|.2alkyl-ZA-C|-2alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O and R5 and R6 together are C2-3a!kyl-A.
In certain embodiments, R8 is selected from hydrogen and Ci.6alkyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R8 is selected from hydrogen and methyl. In more preferred such embodiments, R8 is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, X is O, R2 and R3 are each independently Ci-^aralkyl, and R1 is selected from
Figure imgf000027_0001
aryl, and Ci- όaralkyl, any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Cuβalkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether substituents.
In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R2 or R3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R2 and R3 respectively is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R2 is D. In such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R3 is D. In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of both of the carbons bearing R2 and R3 respectively is D.
Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (III) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
R1 R7 O R3
O R2 R8
(III) wherein each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or
A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z; B is absent or is N(R9)R10, preferably absent;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O;
M is absent or is C|.|2alkyl, preferably C|-8alkyl;
W is selected from -CHO and -B(OR1 ')2;
Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Q-βalkyl; Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; • each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci^alkyl, preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A;
R1 is selected from H, -Ci^alkyl-B, Ci^hydroxyalkyl, Ci^alkoxyalkyl, aryl, and Ci-6aralkyl;
R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, and C i ^heteroaralkyl ;
R4 is N(R5)L-Q-R6;
R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH,
Figure imgf000028_0001
and
Figure imgf000028_0002
preferably hydrogen;
R6 is selected from hydrogen, Q^alkyl, C^alkenyl, C^alkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, Ci-eheteroaralkyl, R"ZAZ-C,-8alkyl-, Rl4Z-C,-8alkyl-, (R11O)(R 12O)P(=O)O-C, -8alkyl- ZAZ-C i-galkyl-, R1 'ZAZ-Cusalkyl-ZAZ-Ci-salkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl-, (RπO)(R12O)P(=O)O-C1-8alkyl-, (R13)2N-CM2alkyl-, (R13)3N+-C,.12alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, RI4SO2C|-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group, more preferably t-butoxycarbonyl or benzyloxycarbonyl; or
R5 and R6 together are C|-6alkyl-Y-C|-6alkyl, C|-6alkyl-ZAZ-C|-6alkyl, ZAZ-Ci- 6alkyl-ZAZ-C|^alkyl, ZAZ-C ι-6alkyl-ZAZ, or Ci.6alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring; R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000028_0003
preferably hydrogen;
R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Ci^alkyl, preferably Ci^alkyl; and R is an N-terminal protecting group;
R1 ' and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation,
Figure imgf000028_0004
Ci-βalkenyl,
Figure imgf000028_0005
aryl, heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000028_0006
and Ci-βheteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and Ci-βalkyl, or R1 ' and R12 together are
Figure imgf000028_0007
thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and
Figure imgf000028_0008
preferably Ci. 6alkyl; and R14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci-βalkyl,
Figure imgf000029_0001
C|.6alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci.earalkyl, and C|_6heteroaralkyl; each R16 is independently selected from hydrogen and
Figure imgf000029_0002
or two occurrences of R1 ' together may be
Figure imgf000029_0003
thereby forming a ring together with the intervening boron and oxygen atoms to which they are attached; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond.
In certain embodiments, R1 is selected from — Ci^alkyl-B and Cι-6aralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Q- βalkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain preferred such embodiments, R1 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from carboxylic acid and ester. In certain embodiments, R1 is selected from methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, carboxymethyl, and benzyl. In certain embodiments R1 is
Figure imgf000029_0004
In certain preferred such embodiments, B is absent.
In certain embodiments, R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000029_0005
and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000029_0006
Ci-βalkyl-indolyl, Ci-βalkyl-thienyl, Ci^alkyl-thiazolyl, and Ci-βalkyl-isothiazolyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including
Figure imgf000029_0007
ester, Ci.salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from C|.6alkyl- phenyl and Ci^alkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000030_0001
R = H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu1, OH, CN, CF3 and CH3. In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 and CH3.
In certain preferred such embodiments where D is attached to a six-membered ring, D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
In certain embodiments, R3 is selected from Ci^aralkyl and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In certain the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci^alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R3 is selected from
Figure imgf000030_0002
and Ci-salkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R3 is selected from
Figure imgf000030_0003
R = H, any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu1, OH, CN, CF3 or CH3. In certain embodiments, D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 or CH3. In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, R6 is Ar-Y-, and each Ar is independently selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like. In certain such embodiments, Ar may be substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Cj- βalkyl. In certain other such embodiments where Q is Ci-βalkyl, Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl.
In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, Q is absent, L is C=O or SO2, and R6 is selected from Ar-Y and heterocyclyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl. In certain other preferred such embodiments, Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is Ci-ealkenyl, where Ci^alkenyl is a substituted vinyl group where the substituent is preferably an aryl or heteroaryl group, more preferably a phenyl group optionally substituted with one to four substituents.
In certain embodiments, L and Q are absent and R6 is selected from Ci^alkyl,
Figure imgf000031_0001
Ci.6alkynyl, d-βaralkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R5 is
Figure imgf000031_0002
and R6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phenylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl. In other embodiments, L is SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from
Figure imgf000031_0003
and aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from methyl and phenyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O and R6 is selected from C|.6alkyl, Ci- 6alkenyl, Ci^alkynyl, aryl, Q^aralkyl, heteroaryl, d-όheteroaralkyl, RnZA-C|.8alkyl-, Rl4Z-C|-8alkyl-, (R"θ)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-, (RπO)(R12O)P(=O)O-C|-8alkyl- ZAZ-C,-8alkyl-, (R10)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C|-8alkyl-Z-C,.8alkyl-, R1 'ZA-C|-galkyl-ZAZ- Cι-8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Csalkyl-, (R13)2N-C,-8alkyl-, (Rl3)3N+-C,-8alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2C|-8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH-, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is H. In certain embodiments, R5 is
Figure imgf000032_0001
R6 is Ci-βalkyl, Q is absent, and L is C=O. In certain such embodiments, R6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfbnyl)ethyl.
In other embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is Ci-βaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl.
In other embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, R5 is
Figure imgf000032_0002
and R6 is aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from heteroaryl and C^heteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, fiiran, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine. In certain alternative such embodiments, R6 is Ci-όheteroaralkyl selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent or O, and R6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Qj-ialkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl. In certain embodiments, L and A are C=O, Q is absent, Z is O, M is C|.galkyl, preferably methylene, and R6 is selected from R"ZA-C|-8alkyl-, R14Z-C|-8alkyl-, R"ZA-Ci-8alkyl-ZAZ-Cι.8alkyl-, (R"θ)(R12O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-ZAZ-Ci-8alkyl-, (R1 lO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-Z-C1-8alkyl-, and heterocyclylMZAZ-Csalkyl-, wherein each occurrence of A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain such embodiments, R is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(R16)(R17), wherein R16 and R17 together are Ci-ealkyl-Y-Ci^alkyl, preferably C|.3alkyl-Y-C|-3alkyl, thereby forming a ring.
In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, M is C|-8alkyl, and R6 is selected from (R1 IO)(RI2O)P(=O)O-C1.8alkyl-, (R13^NC, -8alkyl, (Rl3)3N+C,-8alkyl-, and heterocyclyl-M-. In certain such embodiments, R6 is (R13^N C t .gal kyl or
(R13)3N+C|.8alkyl-, where R13 is In certain other such embodiments, R6 is heterocyclylM-, where heterocyclyl is selected from morpholino, piperidino, piperazino, and pyrrolidino.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci-^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is selected from Ci-βalkyl, cycloalkyl-M, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci-^heteroaralkyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, Rs is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is Cuβalkyl, where Ci^alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl. In further embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is Cj. 6aralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci- βalkyl, Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is
Figure imgf000033_0001
where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyridyl)methyl.
In certain embodiments, L is absent or is C=O, and Rs and R6 together are Ci- 6alkyl-Y-Ci-6alkyl, Ci^alkyl-ZA-Ci^alkyl, or Ci^alkyl-A, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond, thereby forming a ring. In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q and Y are absent, and R5 and R6 together are Ci- 3alkyl-Y-Cι-3alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and Q are absent, and R5 and
R6 together are C|.3alkyl-Y-C|.3alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Q is absent, Y is selected from NH and N-C^alkyl, and R5 and R6 together are Ci^alkyl-Y- Ci-3alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Y is absent, and R5 and R6 together are
Figure imgf000033_0002
In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O, and R5 and R6 together are C|.2alkyl-ZA-Cι-2alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O and R5 and R6 together are C2-3alkyl-A.
In certain embodiments, R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen and C|_6alkyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen and methyl. In more preferred such embodiments, R7 and R8 are both hydrogen.
In certain embodiments, X is O, R2 and R3 are each independently
Figure imgf000033_0003
and R1 is selected from
Figure imgf000033_0004
Ci-βalkoxyalkyl, aryl, and Q- βaralkyl, any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci-βalkyl ester, C|-5alkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether substituents. In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R1, R2, or R3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R1, R2, and R3 respectively is D. In certain preferred such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R1 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R2 is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R3 is D. In certain embodiments the stereochemical configuration of at least two of the carbons bearing R1, R2, and R3 respectively is D. In yet another preferred embodiment, the stereochemical configuration of all three of the carbons bearing R1, R2, and R3 respectively is D.
Another aspect of the invention relates to compounds having a structure of formula (IV) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
Figure imgf000034_0001
(IV) wherein each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably C=O; or
A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2, preferably SO2 or C=O; M is absent or is C|-i2alkyl, preferably Ci-8alkyl;
W is selected from -CHO and -B(OR1 ')2;
Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-Ci-ealkyl;
Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and
Figure imgf000034_0002
preferably O; or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A; R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl, C^aralkyl, heteroaryl, and C i -δheteroaralkyl ;
R4 is N(R5)L-Q-R6;
R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH, Ci^aralkyl, and Ci^alkyl, preferably hydrogen;
R6 is selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, Ci^alkenyl, Ci^alkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-teπninal protecting group, aryl, Ci-βaralkyl, heteroaryl, Ci-6heteroaralkyl, R'^AZ-C^alkyl-, R14Z-Ci-8alkyl-, (RnO)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C1-8alkyl- ZAZ-C1. galkyl-, R1 'ZAZ-d-salkyl-ZAZ-Ci-salkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-Q-salkyl-, (R10)(RI2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-, (RI3)2N-C,-I2alkyl-, (R13)3N+-C,-12alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2Ci.8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; preferably an N- capping group, more preferably t-butoxycarbonyl or benzyloxycarbonyl; or
R5 and R6 together are
Figure imgf000035_0001
ZAZ-Ci- βalkyl-ZAZ-Ci-ealkyl, ZAZ-C i-6alkyl -ZAZ, or Ci-6alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring; R is selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000035_0002
and Ci-earalkyl, preferably hydrogen;
R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and
Figure imgf000035_0003
preferably
Figure imgf000035_0004
and R10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
R1 ' and R1 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Ci^alkyl,
Figure imgf000035_0005
aryl, heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000035_0006
and Ci-βheteroaralkyl, preferably from hydrogen, metal cation, and
Figure imgf000035_0007
thereby forming a ring; each R13 is independently selected from hydrogen and C i galkyl, preferably Ci- δalkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen, C|-6alkyl, Ci^alkenyl, C|.6alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C|.6aralkyl, and Ci-βheteroaralkyl; each R16 is independently selected from hydrogen and
Figure imgf000035_0008
or two occurrences of R1 ' together may be thereby forming a ring together with the intervening boron and oxygen atoms to which they are attached; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond.
In certain embodiments, R2 is selected from Ci^aralkyl and Ci.6heteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000036_0001
Ci-βalkyl-thienyl, Ci-βalkyl-thiazolyl, and Cι-6alkyl-isothiazolyl, wherein the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including
Figure imgf000036_0002
ester, C] -5alkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R2 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000036_0003
phenyl and Ci^alkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R2 is selected
Figure imgf000036_0004
R = H or any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu1, OH, CN, CF3 and CH3. In certain embodiments D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 and CH3..
In certain preferred such embodiments where D is attached to a six-membered ring, D is attached at the 4-position relative to the point of attachment, preferably excluding embodiments where the 4-position of the ring is occupied by the nitrogen of a pyridine ring.
In certain embodiments, R3 is selected from Ci^aralkyl and Ci^heteroaralkyl. In certain the alkyl moiety may contain six, five, four, three, two, or one carbon atoms, preferably one or two. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with one or more substituents selected from hydroxy, halogen, amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci^alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether. In certain such embodiments, R3 is substituted with a substituent selected from alkyl, trihaloalkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, or cyano. In certain such embodiments, R3 is selected from Ci^alkyl-phenyl and Ci^alkyl-indolyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, R3 is selected from
Figure imgf000037_0001
R = H. any suitable protecting group wherein D is selected from H, OMe, OBu', OH, CN, CF3 or CH3. In certain embodiments, D is selected from H, OMe, OH, CN, CF3 or CH3. In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, R6 is Ar-Y-, and each
Ar is independently selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like. In certain such embodiments, Ar maybe substituted with Ar-E-, where E is selected from a direct bond, -O-, and Ci- βalkyl. In certain other such embodiments where Q is Ci^alkyl, Q may be substituted, preferably with Ar, e.g., phenyl.
In certain embodiments, R5 is hydrogen, Q is absent, L is C=O or SO2, and R6 is selected from Ar-Y and heterocyclyl. In certain preferred such embodiments, heterocyclyl is selected from chromonyl, chromanyl, morpholino, and piperidinyl. In certain other preferred such embodiments, Ar is selected from phenyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, naphthyl, quinolinyl, quinolonyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrazyl, and the like.
In certain embodiments, R is hydrogen, L is C=O or SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is Ci-6alkenyl, where is a substituted vinyl group where the substituent is preferably an aryl or heteroaryl group, more preferably a phenyl group optionally substituted with one to four substituents. In certain embodiments, L and Q are absent and R6 is selected from
Figure imgf000037_0003
Ci-βalkenyl, Ci-δalkynyl,
Figure imgf000037_0004
and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R5 is Ci-βalkyi and R6 is selected from butyl, allyl, propargyl, phenylmethyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, and 4-pyridyl.
In other embodiments, L is SO2, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from Ci^alkyl and aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from methyl and phenyl. In certain embodiments, L is C=O and R6 is selected from
Figure imgf000038_0001
Cj- βalkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, aryl, Ci^aralkyl, heteroaryl, C|.6heteroaralkyl, R1 1ZA-Ci-BaIkVl-, R14Z-C i-galkyl-, (R1 O)(R12O)P(=O)O-Cl-8alkyl-, (R1 lO)(RI2O)P(=O)O-C,-galkyl- ZAZ-Ci-8alkyl-, (R10)(R12O)P(=O)O-Cl-8alkyl-Z-C1-8alkyl-, RπZA-Ci-8alkyl-ZAZ- Cl-8alky1-, heterocyclylMZAZ-CLsalkyl-, (R13)2N-Ci-galkyl-, (Rl3)3N+-C|-8alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, Rl4SO2C|.8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH-, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is H.
In certain embodiments, R5 is
Figure imgf000038_0002
R6 is Ci-ealkyl, Q is absent, and L is C=O. In certain such embodiments, R6 is ethyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, or 2- (methylsulfonyl)ethyl.
In other embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is
Figure imgf000038_0003
In certain such embodiments, R6 is selected from 2-phenylethyl, phenylmethyl, (4- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl, and (4-fluorophenyl)methyl.
In other embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, R5 is C|-6alkyl, and R6 is aryl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, and R6 is selected from heteroaryl and Ci-βheteroaralkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is heteroaryl selected from pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine. In certain alternative such embodiments, R6 is
Figure imgf000038_0004
selected from pyrrolylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl. In certain embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent or O, and R6 is carbocyclylM-, wherein M is Co-ialkyl. In certain such embodiments, R6 is cyclopropyl or cyclohexyl. In certain embodiments, L and A are C=O, Q is absent, Z is O, M is C^aHcyl, preferably methylene, and R6 is selected from RnZA-Ci-8alkyl-, Rl4Z-Ci-8alkyl-, R1 'ZA-Cgalkyl-ZAZ-Cgalkyl-, (R1 1O)(Rl 2O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-ZAZ-C,-8alkyl-, (R1 1O)(Rl2O)P(-O)O-C,-8alkyl-Z-CI-8alkyl-, and heterocyclylMZAZ-Csalkyl-, wherein each occurrence of A is independently other than a covalent bond. In certain such embodiments, R6 is heterocyclylMZAZ-Ci-salkyl- where heterocyclyl is substituted or unsubstituted oxodioxolenyl or N(RI6)(R17), wherein R16 and R17 together are
Figure imgf000039_0001
preferably
Figure imgf000039_0002
thereby forming a ring.
In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q is absent, M is C|-8alkyl, and R6 is selected from (R1 1O)(Rl2O)P(=O)O-C1-8alkyl-, (R'^NCi-galkyl, (R13)3N+C,.8alkyl-, and heterocyclyl-M-. In certain such embodiments, R6 is (R13)2NC|.8alkyl or (R13)3N+C|-8alkyl-, where R13 is Ci^alkyl. In certain other such embodiments, R6 is heterocyclylM-, where heterocyclyl is selected from morpholino, piperidino, piperazino, and pyrrolidino. In certain embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Q^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is selected from
Figure imgf000039_0003
cycloalkyl-M, Ci-βaralkyl, and Ci-nheteroaralkyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is Ci^alkyl, where Ci^alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, and isopropyl. In further embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci^alkyl, Q is selected from O and NH and R6 is Ci- δaralkyl, where aralkyl is phenylmethyl. In other embodiments, L is C=O, R5 is Ci- βalkyl, Q is selected from O and NH, and R6 is Ci^heteroaralkyl, where heteroaralkyl is (4-pyridyl)methyl.
In certain embodiments, L is absent or is C=O, and R5 and R6 together are Ci . 6alkyl-Y-Ci-6alkyl,
Figure imgf000039_0004
or C|.6alkyl-A, wherein each occurrence of Z and A is independently other than a covalent bond, thereby forming a ring. In certain preferred embodiments, L is C=O, Q and Y are absent, and R5 and R6 together are C|. 3alky]-Y-Ci-3alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and Q are absent, and R5 and R6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Qoalkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Q is absent, Y is selected from NH and N-Ci.6alkyl, and R5 and R6 together are Ci-3alkyl-Y- Cioalkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L is C=O, Y is absent, and R5 and R6 together are Cioalkyl-Y-Cioalkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O, . and R5 and R6 together are C|-2alkyl-ZA-C|-2alkyl. In another preferred embodiment, L and A are C=O and R5 and R6 together are C2-3alkyl-A.
In certain embodiments, R8 is selected from hydrogen and
Figure imgf000040_0001
In certain preferred such embodiments, R8 is selected from hydrogen and methyl. In more preferred such embodiments, R8 is hydrogen.
In certain embodiments, X is O, R2 and R3 are each independently Ci-βaralkyl, and R1 is selected from Ci^alkyl, Ci^hydroxyalkyl, Ci-6alkoxyalkyl, aryl, and Ci- ήaralkyl, any of which is optionally substituted with one or more of amide, amine, carboxylic acid (or a salt thereof), ester (including Ci^alkyl ester, Ci-salkyl ester, and aryl ester), thiol, or thioether substituents.
In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbons bearing R2 or R3 are independently D or L. In certain preferred embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of at least one of the carbons bearing R2 and R3 respectively is D. In certain such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R2 is D. In such embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of the carbon bearing R is D. In certain embodiments, the stereochemical configuration of both of the carbons bearing R2 and R3 respectively is D.
One aspect of the invention relates to inhibitors that preferentially inhibit immunoproteasome activity over constitutive proteasome activity. In certain embodiments, the EC50 ratio of a compound of any one of formulae I to IV in an assay of constitutive proteasome activity as compared to the EC50 of the same compound in an assay of immunoproteasome activity is greater than 1. In certain such embodiments, the EC50 is greater than 2, 3, 4 or even 5. Suitable assays for the determination of the constitutive proteasome activity and the immunoproteasome activity are described herein (see Example 18).
The term "Cx-yalkyl" refers to substituted or unsubstituted saturated hydrocarbon groups, including straight-chain alkyl and branched-chain alkyl groups that contain from x to y carbons in the chain, including haloalkyl groups such as trifluoromethyl and 2,2,2-tirfluoroethyl, etc. Coalkyl indicates a hydrogen where the group is in a terminal position, a bond if internal. The terms "C2-yalkenyl" and "C2- yalkynyl" refer to substituted or unsubstituted unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
The term "alkoxy" refers to an alkyl group having an oxygen attached thereto. Representative alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, tert-butoxy and the like. An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxy.
The term "Ci-βalkoxyalkyl" refers to a Ci^alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group, thereby forming an ether.
The term "Ci-earalkyl", as used herein, refers to a Ci-βalkyl group substituted with an aryl group.
The terms "amine" and "amino" are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines and salts thereof, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by the general formulae:
Figure imgf000041_0001
wherein R9, R10 and R10 each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R8, or R9 and R10 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; R8 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocyclyl or a polycyclyl; and m is zero or an integer from 1 to 8. In preferred embodiments, only one of R9 or R10 can be a carbonyl, e.g., R9, R10, and the nitrogen together do not form an imide. In even more preferred embodiments, R9 and R10 (and optionally R10 ) each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, or -(CH2)In-R8- In certain embodiments, an amino group is basic, meaning it has a pKa > 7.00. The protonated forms of these functional groups have pKaS above 7.00. The terms "amide" and "amido" are art-recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000042_0001
wherein R9, R10 are as defined above. Preferred embodiments of the amide will not include imides which may be unstable.
The term "aryl" as used herein includes 5-, 6-, and 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted single-ring aromatic groups in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
The term "aryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Aryl groups include benzene, naphthalene, phenanthrene, phenol, aniline, and the like.
The terms "carbocycle" and "carbocyclyl", as used herein, refer to a non- aromatic substituted or unsubstituted ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon. The terms "carbocycle" and "carbocyclyl" also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is carbocyclic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
The term "carbonyl" is art-recognized and includes such moieties as can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000042_0002
wherein X is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and R1 ' represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R8 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R1 1 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH2)in-R8, where m and R8 are as defined above. Where X is an oxygen and R1 ' or R1 ' is not hydrogen, the formula represents an "ester". Where X is an oxygen, and R1 ' is a hydrogen, the formula represents a "carboxylic acid".
As used herein, "enzyme" can be any partially or wholly proteinaceous molecule which carries out a chemical reaction in a catalytic manner. Such enzymes can be native enzymes, fusion enzymes, proenzymes, apoenzymes, denatured enzymes, farnesylated enzymes, ubiquitinated enzymes, fatty acylated enzymes, gerangeranylated enzymes, GPI-linked enzymes, lipid-linked enzymes, prenylated enzymes, naturally- occurring or artificially-generated mutant enzymes, enzymes with side chain or backbone modifications, enzymes having leader sequences, and enzymes complexed with non-proteinaceous material, such as proteoglycans, proteoliposomes. Enzymes can be made by any means, including natural expression, promoted expression, cloning, various solution-based and solid-based peptide syntheses, and similar methods known to those of skill in the art. The term "C 1 -δheteroaralkyl", as used herein, refers to a C 1 -όalkyl group substituted with a heteroaryl group.
The terms "heteroaryl" includes substituted or unsubstituted aromatic 5- to 7- membered ring structures, more preferably 5- to 6-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. The term "heteroaryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heteroaromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Heteroaryl groups include, for example, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like.
The term "heteroatom" as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, and sulfur.
The terms "heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic group" refer to substituted or unsubstituted non-aromatic 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7- membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. The term terms "heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic group" also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heterocyclic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, tetrahydropyran, piperidine, piperazine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, lactones, lactams, and the like. The term "Ci-βhydroxyalkyl" refers to a Ci^alkyl group substituted with a hydroxy group.
As used herein, the term "inhibitor" is meant to describe a compound that blocks or reduces an activity of an enzyme (for example, inhibition of proteolytic cleavage of standard fluorogenic peptide substrates such as suc-LLVY-AMC, Box- LLR-AMC and Z-LLE-AMC, inhibition of various catalytic activities of the 2OS proteasome). An inhibitor can act with competitive, uncompetitive, or noncompetitive inhibition. An inhibitor can bind reversibly or irreversibly, and therefore the term includes compounds that are suicide substrates of an enzyme. An inhibitor can modify one or more sites on or near the active site of the enzyme, or it can cause a conformational change elsewhere on the enzyme.
As used herein, the term "peptide" includes not only standard amide linkage with standard α-substituents, but commonly utilized peptidomimetics, other modified linkages, non-naturally occurring side chains, and side chain modifications, as detailed below.
The terms "polycyclyl" or "polycyclic" refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings". Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted or unsubstituted. The term "preventing" is art-recognized, and when used in relation to a condition, such as a local recurrence (e.g., pain), a disease such as cancer, a syndrome complex such as heart failure or any other medical condition, is well understood in the art, and includes administration of a composition which reduces the frequency of, or delays the onset of, symptoms of a medical condition in a subject relative to a subject which does not receive the composition. Thus, prevention of cancer includes, for example, reducing the number of detectable cancerous growths in a population of patients receiving a prophylactic treatment relative to an untreated control population, and/or delaying the appearance of detectable cancerous growths in a treated population versus an untreated control population, e.g., by a statistically and/or clinically significant amount. Prevention of an infection includes, for example, reducing the number of diagnoses of the infection in a treated population versus an untreated control population, and/or delaying the onset of symptoms of the infection in a treated population versus an untreated control population. Prevention of pain includes, for example, reducing the magnitude of, or alternatively delaying, pain sensations experienced by subjects in a treated population versus an untreated control population.
The term "prodrug" encompasses compounds that, under physiological conditions, are converted into therapeutically active agents. A common method for making a prodrug is to include selected moieties that are hydrolyzed under physiological conditions to reveal the desired molecule. In other embodiments, the prodrug is converted by an enzymatic activity of the host animal.
The term "prophylactic or therapeutic" treatment is art-recognized and includes administration to the host of one or more of the subject compositions. If it is administered prior to clinical manifestation of the unwanted condition (e.g., disease or other unwanted state of the host animal) then the treatment is prophylactic, (i.e., it protects the host against developing the unwanted condition), whereas if it is administered after manifestation of the unwanted condition, the treatment is therapeutic, (i.e., it is intended to diminish, ameliorate, or stabilize the existing unwanted condition or side effects thereof).
The term "substituted" refers to moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the backbone. It will be understood that "substitution" or "substituted with" includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. As used herein, the term "substituted" is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and non-aromatic substituents of organic compounds. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. Substituents can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an alkoxycarbonyl, a formyl, or an acyl), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphate, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfhydryl, an alkylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an aralkyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, if appropriate.
A "therapeutically effective amount" of a compound with respect to the subject method of treatment, refers to an amount of the compound(s) in a preparation which, when administered as part of a desired dosage regimen (to a mammal, preferably a human) alleviates a symptom, ameliorates a condition, or slows the onset of disease conditions according to clinically acceptable standards for the disorder or condition to be treated or the cosmetic purpose, e.g., at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
The term "thioether" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur moiety attached thereto. In preferred embodiments, the "thioether" is represented by - S-alkyl. Representative thioether groups include methylthio, ethylthio, and the like.
As used herein, the term "treating" or "treatment" includes reversing, reducing, or arresting the symptoms, clinical signs, and underlying pathology of a condition in manner to improve or stabilize a subject's condition. Uses of Enzyme Inhibitors
The biological consequences of proteasome inhibition are numerous. Proteasome inhibition has been suggested as a prevention and/or treatment of a multitude of diseases including, but not limited to, proliferative diseases, neurotoxic/degenerative diseases, ischemic conditions, inflammation, immune-related diseases, HIV, cancers, organ graft rejection, septic shock, viral and parasitic infections, conditions associated with acidosis, macular degeneration, pulmonary conditions, muscle wasting diseases, fϊbrotic diseases, bone and hair growth diseases.
Proteasome inhibitors can be used to treat conditions mediated directly by the proteolytic function of the proteasome such as muscle wasting, or mediated indirectly via proteins which are processed by the proteasome such as NF-κB. The proteasome participates in the rapid elimination and post-translational processing of proteins (e.g., enzymes) involved in cellular regulation (e.g., cell cycle, gene transcription, and metabolic pathways), intercellular communication, and the immune response (e.g., antigen presentation).
At the cellular level, the accumulation of polyubiquitinated proteins, cell morphological changes, and apoptosis have been reported upon treatment of cells with various proteasome inhibitors. Yet, it should be noted that commercially available proteasome inhibitors inhibit both the constitutive and immuno- forms of the proteasome. Even bortezomib, the only FDA-approved proteasome inhibitor for the treatment of relapsed multiple myeloma patients, does not distinguish between the two forms (Altun et al, Cancer Res 65:7896, 2005). Thus, what is known about therapeutic proteasome inhibition is based on work with molecules that inhibit both forms of the proteasome. Accordingly, compounds of the invention may be beneficial for reducing the severity of side effects associated with molecules that inhibit both forms of the proteasome. Immunoproteasome expression occurs predominantly in cells and organs that make up the lymphatic system, such as white blood cells(leukocytes), bone marrow, and the thymus, spleen and lymph nodes. Although some organs preferentially express constitutive proteasomes (e.g., heart), others such as adrenal, liver, lung and gut, appear to express both forms. The immune system, of which leukocytes and lymphoid tissues play a major role, is responsible for protecting an organism from outside biological influences. When functioning properly, it protects the body against bacterial and viral infections. The immune system also screens for autologous cells that have undergone oncogenic transformation. Intracellular proteolysis generates small peptides for presentation to T- lymphocytes to induce MHC class I-mediated immune responses. The proteasome is the main provider of these precursor peptides, however, differences between antigenic peptides have been observed between cells with varying amounts of each proteasome form (Cascio et al, EMBO J 20:2357-2366, 2001). In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for inhibiting antigen presentation in a cell, including exposing the cell to a compound described herein. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for altering the repertoire of antigenic peptides produced by the proteasome or other Ntn with multicatalytic activity. For example, if the activity of the immunoproteasome proteasome is selectively inhibited, a different set of antigenic peptides may be produced by the remaining constitutive proteasome and presented in MHC molecules on the surfaces of cells than would be produced and presented without any enzyme inhibition. Several disorders and disease states have been associated with aberrant immune system function, herein referred to as immune-related conditions. Perhaps the most common immune-related condition is the allergic disorders such as allergies, asthma and atopic dermatitis like eczema. These occur when the immune system overreacts to exposure to antigens in the environment. Thus, a further embodiment is a method for suppressing the immune system of a subject including administering to the subject an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor compound in a manner described herein.
Immunodeficiency disorders occur when a part of the immune system is not working properly or is not present. They can affect B lymophyctes, T lymphocytes, or phagocytes and be either inherited (e.g., IgA deficiency, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID), thymic dysplasia and chronic granulomatous) or acquired (e.g., acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS), human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) and drug-induced immunodeficiencies). A dosing strategy utilizing selective proteasome inhibitors of the invention may be used to treat immune-related conditions such as immunodeficiency disorders. In autoimmune disorders, the immune system inappropriately attacks the body's healthy organs and tissues as if they were foreign invaders. An example of an autoimmune disease is Sjogren's Syndrome, which is characterized by infiltration and focal accumulation of lymphocytes in the exocrine glands. A study examining the proteasome expression level revealed a significant up-regulation of beta5i (LMP7) exclusively in the salivary glands of SS patients (Egerer et al, Arthritis Rheum 54: 1501 -
8, 2006). Other examples of such immune-related conditions include lupus, rheumatoid arthritis, scleroderma, ankylosing spondylitis, dermatomyositis, psoriasis, multiple sclerosis and inflammatory bowel disease (such as ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease). Tissue/organ transplant rejection occurs when the immune system mistakenly attacks the cells being introduced to the host's body. Graft versus host disease
(GVHD), resulting from allogenic transplantation, arises when the T cells from the donor tissue go on the offensive and attack the host's tissues. In all three circumstances, autoimmune disease, transplant rejection and GVHD, modulating the immune system by treating the subject with a composition of the invention could be beneficial.
Inflammation is the first response of the immune system to infection or irritation. A cellular component of inflammation involves the movement of leukocytes, which express immunoproteasome, from blood vessels into the inflamed tissue. These cells take on the important role of removing the irritant, bacteria, parasite or cell debris. Proteasome inhibitors are already known to have anti-inflammatory activity (Meng et al, PNAS 96:10403-10408, 1999). In cases of chronic inflammation, which is characterized by a dominating presence of macrophages; the cells that originally served as defensive agents begin to release toxins and cytokines, including TNF-α, now become injurious to the body, resulting in tissue damage and loss. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method of treating inflammation and inflammatory diseases comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor compound described herein. Inflammatory diseases include acute (e.g., bronchitis, conjunctivitis, pancreatitis) and chronic conditions (e.g., chronic cholecstitis, bronchiectasis, aortic valve stenosis, restenosis, psoriasis and arthritis), along with conditions associated with inflammation such as fibrosis, infection and ischemia. Following tissue damage, including damage due to the inflammation process, progression of regeneration and repair begins. During the regeneration step, lost tissue is replaced by proliferation of cells of the same type, which reconstruct the normal architecture. However, improper regeneration of the tissue architecture may have severe consequences. In some cases of chronic inflammatory liver disease, the regenerated tissue forms an abnormal nodular architecture leading to cirrhosis and portal hypertension. The repair process is where lost tissue is replaced by a fibrous scar which is produced from granulation tissue. Fibrosis is the excessive and persistent formation of scar tissue resulting from the hyperproliferative growth of fibroblasts and is associated with activation of the TGF-β signaling pathway. Fibrosis involves extensive deposition of extracellular matrix and can occur within virtually any tissue or across several different tissues. Normally, the level of intracellular signaling protein (Smad) that activate transcription of target genes upon TGF-β stimulation is regulated by proteasome activity (Xu et al., 2000). However, accelerated degradation of the TGF-β signaling components has been observed in cancers and other hyperproliferative conditions. Thus, certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method for treating hyperproliferative conditions such as diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration, diabetic nephropathy, glomerulosclerosis, IgA nephropathy, cirrhosis, biliary atresia, congestive heart failure, scleroderma, radiation-induced fibrosis, and lung fibrosis (idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, collagen vascular disease, sarcoidosis, interstitial lung diseases and extrinsic lung disorders). The treatment of burn victims is often hampered by fibrosis, thus, in certain embodiments, the invention relates to the topical or systemic administration of inhibitors to treat burns. Wound closure following surgery is often associated with disfiguring scars, which may be prevented by inhibition of fibrosis. Thus, in certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for the prevention or reduction of scarring.
Infection by bacteria, parasite or virus all result in initiating the inflammatory process. When the resulting inflammation overwhelms the whole organism, systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS) occurs. The term sepsis is applied when this is due to infection. Overproduction of lipopolysaccharide (LPS)-induced cytokines such as TNFα is considered to be central to the processes associated with septic shock. Not surprisingly, LPS also induces an increase in all components of the MHC-I pathway including the immunoproteasome subunits LMP2 and LMP7 (MacAry et al, PNAS 98:3982-3987, 2001). Furthermore, it is generally accepted that the first step in the activation of cells by LPS is the binding of LPS to specific membrane receptors. The α- and β-subunits of the 2OS proteasome complex have been identified as LPS- binding proteins, suggesting that the LPS-induced signal transduction may be an important therapeutic target in the treatment or prevention of sepsis (Qureshi, N. et al., J. Immun. (2003) 171 : 1515-1525). Therefore, in certain embodiments, the proteasome inhibitors disclosed herein may be used for the inhibition of TNFα to prevent and/or treat septic shock.
In another embodiment, the disclosed compositions are useful for the treatment of a parasitic infection, such as infections caused by protozoan parasites. The proteasome of these parasites is considered to be involved primarily in cell differentiation and replication activities (Paugam et al., Trends Parasitol. 2003, 19(2): 55-59). Furthermore, entamoeba species have been shown to lose encystation capacity when exposed to proteasome inhibitors (Gonzales, et al., Arch. Med. Res. 1997, 28, Spec No: 139-140). In certain such embodiments, the proteasome inhibitor compositions herein are useful for the treatment of parasitic infections in humans caused by a protozoan parasite selected from Plasmodium sps. (including P. falciparum, P. vivax, P. malariae, and P. ovale, which cause malaria), Trypanosoma sps. (including T. cruzi, which causes Chagas' disease, and T. brucei which causes African sleeping sickness), Leishmania sps. (including L. amazonesis, L. donovani, L. infantum, L. mexicana, etc.), Pneumocystis carinii (a protozoan known to cause pneumonia in AIDS and other immunosuppressed patients), Toxoplasma gondii, Entamoeba histolytica,
Entamoeba invadens, and Giardia lamblia. In certain embodiments, the disclosed compositions are useful for the treatment of parasitic infections in animals and livestock caused by a protozoan parasite selected from Plasmodium hermani, Cryptosporidium sps., Echinococcus granulosus, Eimeria tenella, Sarcocystis neurona, and Neurospora crassa. Other compounds useful as proteasome inhibitors in the treatment of parasitic diseases are described in WO 98/10779, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
In certain embodiments, the proteasome inhibitor compositions inhibit proteasome activity in a parasite without recovery in white blood cells. In certain such . embodiments, the long half-life of blood cells may provide prolonged protection with regard to therapy against recurring exposures to parasites. In certain embodiments, the proteasome inhibitors described herein may provide prolonged protection with regard to chemoprophylaxis against future infection.
Viral infections contribute to the pathology of many diseases. Heart conditions such as ongoing myocarditis and dilated cardiomyopathy have been linked to the coxsackievirus B3. In a comparative whole-genome microarray analyses of infected mouse hearts, all three immunoproteasome subunits were uniformly up-regulated in hearts of mice which developed chronic myocarditis (Szalay et al, Am J Pathol 168: 1542-52, 2006). Some viruses utilize the ubiquitin-proteasome system in the viral entry step where the virus is released from the endosome into the cytosol. The mouse hepatitis virus (MHV) belongs to the Coronaviridae family, which also includes the severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) coronvirus. Yu and Lai (J Virol 79:644- 648, 2005) demonstrated that treatment of cells infected with MHV with a proteasome inhibitor resulted in a decrease in viral replication, correlating with reduced viral titer as compared to that of untreated cells. The human hepatitis B virus (HBV), a member of the Hepadnaviridae virus family, requires virally encoded envelop proteins to propagate. Inhibiting the proteasome degradation pathway causes a significant reduction in the amount of secreted envelope proteins (Simsek et al, J Virol 79: 12914- 12920, 2005). In addition to HBV, other hepatitis viruses (A, C, D and E) may also utilize the ubiquitin-proteasome degradation pathway for secretion, morphogenesis and pathogenesis. The bacterium Listeria monocytogenes causes a condition known as listeriosis, the manifestations of which range from mild (nausea, vomiting and diarrhea) to severe (septicemia, meningitis, encephalitis). A quantitative analysis of changes in proteasome subunit composition revealed that infection of mice with lymphocytic choriomeningitis virus or Listeria monocytogenes lead to an almost complete replacement of constitutive proteasomes by immunoproteasomes in the liver within seven days (Khan et al, J Immunol 167:6859-6868, 2001). Prokaryotes have what is equivalent to the eukaryote 2OS proteasome particle. While the subunit composition of the prokaryote 2OS particle is simpler than that of eukaryotes, it does have the ability to hydrolyze peptide bonds in a similar manner. For example, the nucleophilic attack on the peptide bond occurs through the threonine residue on the N-terminus of the β- subunits. Thus, an embodiment of this invention relates to a method of treating prokaryotic infections, comprising administering to a subject an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor composition disclosed herein. Prokaryotic infections may include diseases caused by either mycobacteria (such as tuberculosis, leprosy or Buruli Ulcer) or archaebacteria.
Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for treating infection (e.g., bacterial, parasitic or viral), including contacting a cell with (or administering to a subject) an effective amount of a compound disclosed herein.
Ischemia and reperfusion injury results in hypoxia, a condition in which there is a deficiency of oxygen reaching the tissues of the body. This condition causes increased degradation of Iκ-Bα, thereby resulting in the activation of NF-κB (Koong et al., 1994). Interestingly, factors which have been identified as being able to enhance immunoproteasome expression, TNF-α and lipopolysaccharide, also stimulate NF-κB activation. It has been demonstrated that the severity of injury resulting in hypoxia can be reduced with the administration of a proteasome inhibitor (Gao et al., 2000; Bao et al., 2001; Pye et al., 2003). Therefore, certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method of treating an ischemic condition or reperfusion injury comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor compound disclosed herein. Examples of such conditions or injuries include, but are not limited to, acute coronary syndrome (vulnerable plaques), arterial occlusive disease (cardiac, cerebral, peripheral arterial and vascular occlusions), atherosclerosis (coronary sclerosis, coronary artery disease), infarctions, heart failure, pancreatitis, myocardial hypertrophy, stenosis, and restenosis.
Cachexia is a syndrome characterized by wasting of skeletal muscle associated with enhanced proteolysis due to the ubiquitin-proteasome pathway. Inhibiting the proteasome reduces proteolysis, thereby reducing both muscle protein loss and the nitrogenous load on kidneys or liver (Tawa et al., JCI 100:197-203, 1997). In cachexia, elevated expression of proinflammatory cytokines, TNF-α and IFN-γ, both of which stimulate expression of immunoproteasome subunits, have been reported (Acharyya et al., JCI 1 14:370-378, 2004). In fact, most types of muscle atrophy exhibit elevated rates of protein degradation (Lecker et al., FASEB J 18:39-51, 2004). Muscle wasting manifests itself in several life threatening diseases, including cancer, sepsis, renal failure, AIDS, fasting, denervation atrophy, acidosis, diabetes, disuse atrophy and congestive heart failure. One embodiment of the invention relates to the treatment of cachexia and muscle- wasting diseases. Methods of the invention are useful for treating conditions such as cancer, chronic infectious diseases, fever, muscle disuse (atrophy) and denervation, nerve injury, fasting, renal failure associated with acidosis, and hepatic failure. See, e.g., Goldberg, U.S. Patent No. 5,340,736.
Degradation of certain proteins by the proteasome effect signaling mechanisms that, in turn, effect gene transcription, cell cycle and metabolic pathways. As noted above, proteasome inhibitors block both degradation and processing of ubiquitinated NF-KB in vitro and in vivo. Proteasome inhibitors also block IKB-A degradation and NF-KB activation (Palombella, et al. Cell (1994) 78:773-785; and Traenckner, et al., EMBO J. (1994) 13:5433-5441). One embodiment of the invention is a method for inhibiting IκB-α degradation, including contacting the cell with a compound described herein.
In certain embodiments, the invention relates to methods for affecting cyclin- dependent eukaryotic cell cycles, including exposing a cell (in vitro or in vivo) to a proteasome inhibitor disclosed herein. Cyclins are proteins involved in cell cycle control. The proteasome participates in the degradation of cyclins. Examples of cyclins include mitotic cyclins, Gl cyclins, and cyclin B. Degradation of cyclins enables a cell to exit one cell cycle stage (e.g., mitosis) and enter another (e.g., division). It is believed all cyclins are associated with p34cdc2 protein kinase or related kinases. The proteolysis targeting signal is localized to amino acids 42-
RAALGNISEN-50 (destruction box). There is evidence that cyclin is converted to a form vulnerable to a ubiquitin ligase or that a cyclin-specific ligase is activated during mitosis (Ciechanover, A., Cell, (1994) 79:13-21). Inhibition of the proteasome inhibits cyclin degradation, and therefore inhibits cell proliferation, for example, in cyclin- related cancers (Kumatori et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1990) 87:7071-7075). In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for treating a proliferative disease in a subject (e.g., cancer, psoriasis, or restenosis), comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor composition in a manner disclosed herein. The invention also relates to a method for treating cycl in-related inflammation in a subject, comprising adminstering to a subject a therapeutically effective amount of a proteasome inhibitor composition in a manner described herein.
Tn maturing reticulocytes and growing fibroblasts, cells deprived of insulin or serum, the rate of proteolysis nearly doubles, suggesting a role for the proteasome in cellular metabolism. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to methods for reducing the rate of intracellular protein degradation in a cell. Each of these methods comprises contacting a cell (in vivo or in vitro, e.g., a muscle in a subject) with an effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a proteasome inhibitor disclosed herein.
Alzheimer's disease (AD) is a progressive neurodegenerative disease disorder associated with a loss of higher cognitive function. Pathological hallmarks of the disease include senile amyloid plaques, neurofibrillary tangles, dystrophic neuritis and significant neuronal loss in selected regions of the brain. Microglia, the resident macrophages in the brain, release numerous proinflammatory cytokines, including . TNF-α, when activated by Aβ42, a peptide associated with neuritic and vascular amyloid plaques. This microglial-mediated inflammatory response contributes to significant neuronal loss. Cell-based studies demonstrated that primary cortical neurons treated with conditioned media from microglial BV2 cells stimulated either with LPS/INF-γ or sonicated Aβ42 peptides resulted in approximately a 60% decrease in cell viability (Gan et al., J. Biol. Chem. 279:5565-5572, 2004). A higher expression of immunoproteasome is found in brain tissue from AD patients than in that of non- demented elderly adults (Mishto et al, Neurobiol Aging 27:54-66, 2006). Patients suffering from Huntington's disease (HD), another neurodegenerative disorder, display motor dysfunction and cognitive decline over a period of years until death. Upon autopsy, the presence of inclusions or intraneuronal aggregates, caused by a polyQ expansion mutation (also referred to as a CAG triplet repeat expansion), can be detected, accompanied by significant atrophy in the striatum and cortex portions of the brain, lmmunohistochemistry revealed that there was a significant enhancement in immunoproteasome expression in the striatum and frontal cortex of brains from HD patients as compared to those from age-matched normal adults (Diaz-Hernandez et al, J Neurosci 23:1 1653-1161, 2003). Upon further analysis, it was discovered that the enhancement predominantly occurred in the degenerating neurons. Using a mouse model of HD, the researchers noted a selective increase in both chymotrypsin- and trypsin-like activities in the affected and aggregate-containing regions of the brain, primarily the cortex and striatum (Diaz-Hernandez et al, J Neurosci 23:1 1653-1 161, 2003).
Accordingly, certain embodiments of the invention relate to the use of proteasome inhibitor compositions disclosed herein for the treatment of neurodegenerative diseases. Neurodegenerative diseases and conditions includes, but not limited to, stroke, ischemic damage to the nervous system, neural trauma (e.g., percussive brain damage, spinal cord injury, and traumatic damage to the nervous system), multiple sclerosis and other immune-mediated neuropathies (e.g., Guillain- Barre syndrome and its variants, acute motor axonal neuropathy, acute inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, and Fisher Syndrome), HIV/AIDS dementia complex, axonomy, diabetic neuropathy, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, multiple sclerosis, bacterial, parasitic, fungal, and viral meningitis, encephalitis, vascular dementia, multi -infarct dementia, Lewy body dementia, frontal lobe dementia such as Pick's disease, subcortical dementias (such as Huntington or progressive supranuclear palsy), focal cortical atrophy syndromes (such as primary aphasia), metabolic-toxic dementias (such as chronic hypothyroidism or B12 deficiency), and dementias caused by infections (such as syphilis or chronic meningitis).
It has also been demonstrated that inhibitors that bind to the 2OS proteasome stimulate bone formation in bone organ cultures. Furthermore, when such inhibitors have been administered systemically to mice, certain proteasome inhibitors increased bone volume and bone formation rates over 70% (Garrett, I. R. et al., J. Clin. Invest.
(2003) 111 : 1771-1782), therefore suggesting that the ubiquitin-proteasome machinery regulates osteoblast differentiation and bone formation. Therefore, the disclosed proteasome inhibitor compositions may be useful in the treatment and/or prevention of diseases associated with bone loss, such as osteroporosis. Cancer is a general term for disease characterized by uncontrolled, abnormal growth of cells. Many cancers arise via multistep pathways involving inactivation of tumor suppressor proteins and activation of oncogenic peptides. Cancer cells can spread to other parts of the body through the lymphatic system or blood stream. Usually, cancer is classified according to the type of tissue or cell most prominently involved. As noted previously, proteasome inhibition has already been validated as a therapeutic strategy for the treatment of cancer, particularly multiple myeloma. As shown in Figure 1, multiple myeloma cells possess both forms of the proteasome, although the ratio can vary somewhat. Multiple myeloma is a hematologic disease characterized by an excessive number of abnormal plasma cells in the bone marrow. Plasma cells develop from B-cells, thus it is not surprising that other B-cell malignancies would also express immunoproteasome to some extent. Except for two chronic mylogenous leukemia cell lines, heme-related cancers (e.g., multiple myeloma, leukemias and lymphomas) generally appear to express immunoproteasome (Figure I). Cancer cells originating from lymphoid cells express 30% or more immunoproteasome. In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for the treatment of cancer, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein. In certain preferred embodiments, the cancer is a heme-related disorder. Intriguingly, some cancers (e.g., solid tumors, head and neck squamous cell carcinoma, cervical carcinoma and small cell lung carcinoma) appear to have down regulated immunoproteasome expression (Evans et al, J Immunol 167:5420, 2001; Meissner et al, Clin Cancer Res 11 :2552, 2005; Restifo et al, J Exp Med 177:265-272, 1993). This appears to be correlated with deficient antigen processing and may be a strategy used by tumor cells to escape immune surveillance. The treatment of the cells with INF-γ could induce immunoproteasome expression. Therefore, certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method of treating cancers comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of INF-γ or TNF-α and a proteasome inhibitor compound disclosed herein.
Administration
Compounds prepared as described herein can be administered in various forms, depending on the disorder to be treated and the age, condition, and body weight of the patient, as is well known in the art. For example, where the compounds are to be administered orally, they may be formulated as tablets, capsules, granules, powders, or syrups; or for parenteral administration, they may be formulated as injections (intravenous, intramuscular, or subcutaneous), drop infusion preparations, or suppositories. For application by the ophthalmic mucous membrane route, they may be formulated as eye drops or eye ointments. These formulations can be prepared by conventional means, and if desired, the active ingredient may be mixed with any conventional additive or excipient, such as a binder, a disintegrating agent, a lubricant, a corrigent, a solubilizing agent, a suspension aid, an emulsifying agent, a coating agent, a cyclodextrin, and/or a buffer. Although the dosage will vary depending on the symptoms, age and body weight of the patient, the nature and severity of the disorder to be treated or prevented, the route of administration and the form of the drug, in general, a daily dosage of from 0.01 to 2000 mg of the compound is recommended for an adult human patient, and this may be administered in a single dose or in divided doses. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect.
The precise time of administration and/or amount of the composition that will yield the most effective results in terms of efficacy of treatment in a given patient will depend upon the activity, pharmacokinetics, and bioavailability of a particular compound, physiological condition of the patient (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, and type of medication), route of administration, etc. However, the above guidelines can be used as the basis for fine-tuning the treatment, e.g., determining the optimum time and/or amount of administration, which will require no more than routine experimentation consisting of monitoring the subject and adjusting the dosage and/or timing.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those ligands, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" as used herein means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition, or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose, and sucrose; (2) starches, such as com starch, potato starch, and substituted or unsubstituted β-cyclodextrin; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, com oil, and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; and (21) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations. In certain embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are non- pyrogenic, i.e., do not induce significant temperature elevations when administered to a patient. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of the inhibitor(s). These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the inhibitor(s), or by separately reacting a purified inhibitor(s) in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed. Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, naphthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, laurylsulphonate salts, and amino acid salts, and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pharm. Sci. 66: 1-19.)
In other cases, the inhibitors useful in the methods of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts with pharmaceutically acceptable bases. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic inorganic and organic base addition salts of an inhibitors). These salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the inhibitor(s), or by separately reacting the purified inhibitors) in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate, or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically acceptable organic primary, secondary, or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts, and the like. Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, and the like (see, for example, Berge et al., supra). Wetting agents, emulsifϊers, and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite, and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
Formulations suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or nonaqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert matrix, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouthwashes, and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of an inhibitors) as an active ingredient. A composition may also be administered as a bolus, electuary, or paste.
In solid dosage forms for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules, and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, cyclodextrins, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose, and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar- agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, acetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; (8) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such a talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and (10) coloring agents. In the case of capsules, tablets, and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols, and the like. A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered inhibitors) moistened with an inert liquid diluent. Tablets, -and other Solid dosage forms, such as dragees, capsules, pills, and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical -formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes, and/or microspheres. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in microencapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients. Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents, and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1 ,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols, and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming, and preservative agents. Suspensions, in addition to the active inhibitor(s) may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar- agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof. Formulations for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more inhibitor(s) with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active agent.
Formulations which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams, or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of an inhibitor(s) include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches, and inhalants. The active component may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
The ointments, pastes, creams, and gels may contain, in addition to inhibitor(s), excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc, and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to an inhibitor(s), excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates, and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
The inhibitor(s) can be alternatively administered by aerosol. This is accomplished by preparing an aqueous aerosol, liposomal preparation, or solid particles containing the composition. A nonaqueous (e.g., fluorocarbon propellant) suspension could be used. Sonic nebulizers are preferred because they minimize exposing the agent to shear, which can result in degradation of the compound.
Ordinarily, an aqueous aerosol is made by formulating an aqueous solution or suspension of the agent together with conventional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and stabilizers. The carriers and stabilizers vary with the requirements of the particular composition, but typically include nonionic surfactants (T weens, Pluronics, sorbitan esters, lecithin, Cremophors), pharmaceutically acceptable co-solvents such as polyethylene glycol, innocuous proteins like serum albumin, oleic acid, amino acids such as glycine, buffers, salts, sugars, or sugar alcohols. Aerosols generally are prepared from isotonic solutions.
Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of an inhibitors) to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the agent in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the inhibitor(s) across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the inhibitors) in a polymer matrix or gel.
Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more inhibitors(s) in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols
(such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants. These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include tonicity-adjusting agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. For example, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of inhibitor(s) in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue. The preparations of agents maybe given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are, of course, given by forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, infusion; topically by lotion or ointment; and rectally by suppositories. Oral administration is preferred. The phrases "parenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrastemal injection, and infusion. The phrases "systemic administration," "administered systemically," "peripheral administration" and "administered peripherally" as used herein mean the administration of a ligand, drug, or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
These inhibitors(s) may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracistemally, and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually. Regardless of the route of administration selected, the inhibitors), which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.
Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
The concentration of a disclosed compound in a pharmaceutically acceptable mixture will vary depending on several factors, including the dosage of the compound to be administered, the pharmacokinetic characteristics of the compound(s) employed, and the route of administration. In general, the compositions of this invention may be provided in an aqueous solution containing about 0.1-10% w/v of a compound disclosed herein, among other substances, for parenteral administration. Typical dose ranges are from about 0.01 to about 50 mg/kg of body weight per day, given in 1-4 divided doses. Each divided dose may contain the same or different compounds of the invention. The dosage will be an effective amount depending on several factors including the overall health of a patient, and the formulation and route of administration of the selected compound(s).
Another aspect of the invention provides a conjoint therapy wherein one or more other therapeutic agents are administered with the proteasome inhibitor. Such conjoint treatment may be achieved by way of the simultaneous, sequential, or separate dosing of the individual components of the treatment.
In certain embodiments, a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with one or more other proteasome inhibitor(s). In certain embodiments, a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with a chemotherapeutic. Suitable chemotherapeutics may include, natural products such as vinca alkaloids (i.e. vinblastine, vincristine, and vinorelbine), paclitaxel, epidipodophyllotoxins (i.e. etoposide, teniposide), antibiotics (dactinomycin (actinomycin D) daunorubicin, doxorubicin and idarubicin), anthracyclines, mitoxantrone, bleomycins, plicamycin (mithramycin) and mitomycin, enzymes (L- asparaginase which systemically metabolizes L-asparagine and deprives cells which do not have the capacity to synthesize their own asparagine); antiplatelet agents; antiproliferative/antimitotic alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustards (mechlorethamine, cyclophosphamide and analogs, melphalan, chlorambucil), ethylenimines and methylmelamines (hexamethylmelamine and thiotepa), alkyl sulfonates (busulfan), nitrosoureas (carmustine (BCNU) and analogs, streptozocin), trazenes - dacarbazinine (DTIC); antiproliferative/antimitotic antimetabolites such as folic acid analogs (methotrexate), pyrimidine analogs (fluorouracil, floxuridine, and cytarabine), purine analogs and related inhibitors (mercaptopurine, thioguanine, pentostatin and 2-chlorodeoxyadenosine); aromatase inhibitors (anastrozole, exemestane, and letrozole); and platinum coordination complexes (cisplatin, carboplatin), procarbazine, hydroxyurea, mitotane, aminoglutethimide; hormones (i.e. estrogen) and hormone agonists such as leutinizing hormone releasing hormone (LHRH) agonists (goserelin, leuprolide and triptorelin). Other chemotherapeutic agents may include mechlorethamine, camptothecin, ifosfamide, tamoxifen, raloxifene, gemcitabine, navelbine, or any analog or derivative variant of the foregoing.
In certain embodiments, a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with a steroid. Suitable steroids may include, but are not limited to, 21- acetoxypregnenolone, alclometasone, algestone, amcinonide, beclomethasone, betamethasone, budesonide, chloroprednisone, clobetasol, clocortolone, cloprednol, corticosterone, cortisone, cortivazol, deflazacort, desonide, desoximetasone, dexamethasone, diflorasone, diflucortolone, difuprednate, enoxolone, fluazacort, flucloronide, flumethasone, flunisolide, fluocinolone acetonide, fluocinonide, fluocortin butyl, fluocortolone, fluorometholone, fluperolone acetate, fluprednidene acetate, fluprednisolone, flurandrenolide, fluticasone propionate, formocortal, halcinonide, halobetasol propionate, halometasone, hydrocortisone, loteprednol etabonate, mazipredone, medrysone, meprednisone, methylprednisolone, mometasone furoate, paramethasone, prednicarbate, prednisolone, prednisolone 25-diethylaminoacetate, prednisolone sodium phosphate, prednisone, prednival, prednylidene, rimexolone, tixocortol, triamcinolone, triamcinolone acetonide, triamcinolone benetonide, triamcinolone hexacetonide, and salts and/or derivatives thereof. In certain embodiments, a compound of the invention is conjointly administered with an immunotherapeutic agent. Suitable immunotherapeutic agents may include, but are not limited to, cyclosporine, thalidomide, and monoclonal antibodies. The monoclonal antibodies can be either naked or conjugated such as rituximab, tositumomab, alemtuzumab, epratuzumab, ibritumomab tiuxetan, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, bevacizumab, cetuximab, erlotinib and trastuzumab.
Exemplification
Scheme 1: Synthesis of Example 1
Dimethyl hydroxyamine HCI IBCF, NMM, TEA, DCM
Figure imgf000068_0001
(A)
Figure imgf000068_0002
Figure imgf000068_0003
Synthesis of (A)
To a solution of Cbz-Trp-OH ( 10 g, 29 mmol) in DMF ( 150 mL) was added Me-Im (25.2 mL, 458 mmol) dropwise. The solution was allowed to stir for 10 minutes followed by the addition of TBSCl (23.9 g,l 58 mmol). The resulting solution was allowed to stir overnight. Water (10O mL) was then added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3 x 50 mL) and brine (50 m 1), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield an oil that was dissolved in 1 : 1 water/THF (200 mL) and K2CO3 (440 mg, 0.031 mmol) was added to the solution. The resulting solution was allowed to stir overnight. The organic solvent was then removed under reduced pressure and the pH adjusted to 2 with IN HCl. The resulting solution was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 75 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield (A).
Synthesis of (B) To a solution of dimethyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride (3.6 g, 36.9mmol) in
DCM (20 mL) at 0 0C was added diisopropylethylamine (DIEA) (5 mL, 54.7 mmol) dropwise. The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 20 minutes.
To a solution of (A) in DCM (20 mL) at 0 °C was added isobutylchlorformate (IBCF) (5 mL, 51.5 mmol) dropwise, followed by the drop wise addition of N- methylmorpholine (NMM) (4.0 mL, 56.7 mmol). The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 10 minutes before adding it to the previously prepared dimethyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride/DlEA solution. The mixture was allowed to stir for 3 hrs at 0 0C, followed by the addition of water (50 mL). The layers were separated and the water layer was washed with DCM (3 x 15 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with IN HCl (3 x 20 mL) and brine (20 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield an oil that was purified by flash chromatography using 20 to 40% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to yield (B).
Synthesis of (C)
To a solution of (B) (6.82 g, 14.4 mmol) in a solution of THF (40 mL) at -200C was added a solution isopropenyl magnesium bromide (90 mL, 0.5 M in THF) while keeping the internal temperature below -5 0C. The solution was allowed to stir for 3 hrs at 0 °C followed by the addition of IN HCl (20 mL). The solution was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake washed with EtOAc. The organic solvent was then removed under reduced pressure and the remaining aqueous solution was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 20 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with sat. NaHCO3 (3x, 15 mL) and brine (15 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide an oil that was purified by flash chromatography using 10 to 20% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to yield (C).
Synthesis of (D) and (E)
To a solution of (C) (3.06 g, 6.75 mmol) in MeOH (40 mL) and THF (40 mL) was added CeCl3-VH2O (3.64 g, 9.77 mmol). The resulting mixture was allowed to stir until it became homogenous. The solution was then cooled to 00C and NaBH4 (369 mg, 9.75 mmol) was added over 10 minutes. The solution was allowed to stir for 1 hr followed by the addition of AcOH (5 mL) with continued stirring for 20 minutes. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was diluted with water (30 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 10 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3 x 10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a 4/1 mixture of (D) and (E).
Synthesis of (F) and (G)
To a solution of (D) and (E) in DCM (90 mL) at 0 0C was added VO(acac)2 (63 mg, 0.23 mmol), after stirring for 5 minutes t-BuOOH (2.25 mL, 6.0M in decane) was added dropwise. The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 2 hrs and was then filtered through Celite 521, and the filter cake was washed with DCM (20 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with sat. NaHCO3 (3 x 20 mL) and brine (20 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a 4/1 mixture of (F) and (G).
Synthesis of (H)
To a solution of Dess-Martin periodinane (6.75 g, 15.9 mmol) in DCM (75 mL) at 0 °C was added a solution of (F) and (G) in DCM (35 mL) dropwise. The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. The solvent was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was diluted with EtOAc (20 mL) and sat. NaHCO3 (20 mL). The resulting mixture was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake was washed with EtOAc (20 mL). The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with water (3 x 10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide an mixture of (H) and (I) (4/1) that was purified by flash chromatography using 15 to 40% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to yield (H).
Synthesis ofl
To a solution of (H) (50 mg, 1.06 mmol) in TFA (5 mL) was added Pd/C (14 mg, 10%). The resulting mixture was allowed to stir under 1 atmosphere of H2 for 2 hrs followed by dilution with DCM (10 mL). The mixture was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake was washed with DCM (10 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure a second time. The residue was placed under high vacuum for 2 hrs to provide 1.
Scheme 2: Synthesis of Example 2
Figure imgf000072_0001
Synthesis of (J)
To a solution of Fmoc-Trp (Boc)-OH (2.4 mmol, 1.0 g,) in DCM (20 mL) was added Me-Im (6.7 mmol, 0.370 mL) and the mixure was stirred until the solution was homogenous, at which time l-(mesitylene-2-sulfonyl)-3-nitro-l ,2,4-triazole (MSNT) (2.9 mmol, 0.870 g,) was added. Once the MSNT had dissolved, the reaction mixture was added to HMPB-BHA resin (0.8 mmol, 1.25 g) and the resulting solution was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The resin was filtered and washed with DMF (50 mL), MeOH (50 mL), and DCM (50 mL). The resin was then allowed to air dry to provide (J). Synthesis of (K)
To (J) (0.40 mmol, 0.62 g) was added 20% piperidine/DMF (10 mL) and the resulting heterogeneous solution was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (20 mL), MeOH (20 mL), and DCM (20 mL) and allowed to air dry before subjecting it to the above reaction condition a second time to yield (K).
Synthesis of (L)
To (K) (0.40 mmol) was added DMF (20 mL), Cbz-D-Ala-OH (0.40 mmol, 0.090 g), DIEA (1.6 mmol, 0.12 mL), HOBT (0.64 mmol, 0.062 mg), and BOP (0.64 mmol, 0.178 g) and the reaction mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The reaction mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (40 mL), MeOH (40 mL), and DCM (40 mL), and allowed to air dry, to yield (L).
Synthesis of (M)
To (L) (0.08 mmol) was added 5% TFA/DCM (2 mL) and the mixture was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The reaction was filtered and the resin was washed with DCM (10 mL). The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting oil was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and evaporated a total of three times to yield (M).
Synthesis of (N)
To a stirred solution of (M) (0.11 mmol, 0.019 g) in MeCN (4 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added (M) (0.1 mmol), DIEA (2.9 mmol, 0.5 mL), HOBT (0.2 mmol, 0.032 g), and HBTU (0.23 mmol, 0.087 g) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was diluted with sat NaHCO3 (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with sat. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over MgSO4, and the volatiles removed under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography using 20 to 40% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to afford (N). Synthesis of 2
To a stirred solution of (N) (0.1 mmol) in pyridine (1.5 rnL) and THF (3.0 mL) at 00C was added a solution of HF/pyridine dropwise. The solution was allowed to stir for 2 hours at 00C prior to the addition of water (5.0 mL) and extraction with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with sat. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over MgSO4, filetered and the volatiles removed under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography using 30 to 60% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent, to afford 2 (4.2 mg).
Scheme 3: Synthesis of Example 3
H Fmoc-"
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000075_0002
(S)
Synthesis of (O)
To a solution of Fmoc-Tyr(Me)-OH (1.9 mmol, 0.80 g,) in DCM (20 mL) was added Me-Im (6.7 mmol, 0.370 mL). When the solution was homogenous, MSNT (2.9 mmol, 0.870 g,) was added and the mixture was stirred until the MSNT dissolved, at which time HMPB-BHA resin (0.64 mmol, 1.00 g) and the resulting solution was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The resin was filtered and washed with DMF (50 mL), MeOH (50 mL), and DCM (50 riiL) and then the resin was allowed to air dry, to yield (O).
Synthesis of (P)
To (O) (0.40 mmol, 0.62 g) was added 20% piperidine/DMF (10 mL) and the resulting heterogenous solution was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (20 mL), MeOH (20 mL), and DCM (20 mL) and allowed to air dry. The resin was then subjected to the above reaction condition a second time to yield (P).
Synthesis of (Q) To (P) (0.40 mmol) was added DMF (20 mL), Cbz-D-Ala-OH (0.40 mmol,
0.090 g), DIEA (1.6 mmol, 0.12 mL), HOBT (0.64 mmol, 0.062 mg), and BOP (0.64 mmol, 0.178 g) and the reaction mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The reaction mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (40 mL), MeOH (40 mL), and DCM (40 mL), and allowed to air dry, to yield (Q). Synthesis of (R)
To (Q) (0.08 mmol) was added 5% TFA/DCM (2 mL) and the mixture was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The reaction was filtered and the resin was washed with DCM (10 mL). The volatiles were then removed under reduced pressure and the resulting oil was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and evaporated a total of three times to yield (R).
Synthesis of (S)
To a stirred solution of 1 (0.11 mmol, 0.019 g) in MeCN (4 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added (R) (0.1 mmol), DIEA (2.9 mmol, 0.5 mL), HOBT (0.2 mmol, 0.032g), and HBTU (0.23 mmol, 0.087 g) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was diluted with sat NaHCθ3 (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with sat. NaHCO3, and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was purified by flash chromatography using 20 to 40% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to afford (S). Synthesis of 3
To a stirred solution of (S) (0.1 mmol), in pyridine (1.5 mL) and THF (3.0 mL) at 00C was added a solution of HF/Pyridine dropwise. The solution was allowed to stir for 2 hours at 00C followed by the addition of water (5.0 mL) and extraction with EtOAc. The organic layer was then washed with sat. NaHCC>3, and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was purified by flash chromatography using 30 to 60% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent, to afford 3 (6.7 mg).
Scheme 4: Synthesis of Example 4
Figure imgf000077_0001
Synthesis of (U)
To a solution of dimethyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride (18.4 g, 226.3 mmol) in DCM (400 mL) at 0 0C was added DIEA (25.8 mL, 282 mmol) dropwise. The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 20 minutes. To a solution of Cbz-Phe-OH (50 g, 169 mmol) in DCM (400 mL) at 0 0C was added IBCF (24.4 mL, 266 mmol) dropwise, followed by the dropwise addition of NMM (20.7 mL, 293 mmol). The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 10 minutes then added to the previously prepared dimethyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride/DIEA solution. The mixture was allowed to stir for 3 hrs at 0 0C followed by the addition of water (250 mL). The layers were then separated and the water layer washed with DCM (3 x 100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with IN HCl (3 x 100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield an oil that was purified by flash chromatography using 20 to 40% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent, to yield (U). Synthesis of (V)
To a solution of (U) (47 g, 145 mmol) in a solution of THF (400 mL) at -20 0C was added a solution isopropenyl magnesium bromide (800 mL, 0.5 M in THF) while keeping the internal temperature below -5 0C. The solution was allowed to stir for 3 hrs at 00C followed by the addition of IN HCl (200 mL). The solution was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake washed with EtOAc. The organic solvent was then removed under reduced pressure and the remaining aqueous solution was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 200 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with satd. NaHCO3 (3 x 150 mL) and brine (150 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield an oil that was purified by flash chromatography using 20 to 40% EtOAc/hexancs as the clucnt to yield (V).
Synthesis of (W) and (X)
To a solution of (V) (30.03 g, 92.0 mmol) in MeOH (500 mL) and THF (500 mL) was added CeCl3'7H2θ (48.04 g, 130 mmol). The resulting solution was allowed to stir until it became homogenous. The solution was then cooled to 0 0C and NaBH4 (4.90 mg, 129 mmol) was added over a 10 minute period. The solution was allowed to stir for 1 hr followed by the addition of AcOH (70 mL) with continued stirring for 20 minutes. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue diluted with water (400 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 130 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3x, 130 mL) and brine (130 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a 5/1 mixture of (W) and (X).
Synthesis of (Y) and (Z)
To a solution of (W) and (X) in DCM (500 mL) at 0 0C was added VO(acac>2 (900 mg, 3.26 mmol), after stirring for 5 minutes t-BuOOH (30 mL, 6.0M in decane) was added dropwise. The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 2 hrs then filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake was washed with DCM (200 mL). The filtrate was then washed with satd. NaHCθ3 (3 x 200 mL) and brine (200 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a 5/1 mixture of (Y) and (Z).
Synthesis of (AA) To a solution of Dess-Martin periodinane (40 g, 94.2 mmol) in DCM (300 mL) at 00C was added a solution of (Y) and (Z) in DCM (100 mL) dropwise. The solution was then allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue diluted with EtOAc (120 mL) and satd. NaHCO3 (120 mL). The resulting mixture was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake washed with EtOAc (120 mL). The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with water (3 x 60 mL) and brine (60 mL), dried over MgSO4 filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give an oil that was purified by flash chromatography using 15 to 40% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to yield (AA). Synthesis of 4
To a solution of (AA) (50 mg, 1.06 mmol) in TFA (5 mL) was added Pd/C (14 mg, 10%). The resulting mixture was allowed to stir under 1 atmosphere H2 for 2 hrs, and then diluted with DCM (10 mL). The mixture was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake washed with DCM (10 mL). The filtrate was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue diluted with DCM (10 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure a second time. The residue was placed under high vacuum for 2 hrs to yield 4.
Scheme 5: Synthesis of Example 5
Figure imgf000080_0001
(BB) (CC)
Figure imgf000080_0002
Synthesis of (CC)
To (BB) (0.06 mmol) was added DMF (2 mL), Cbz-D-Abu-OH (0.12 mmol, 0.032 g), DIEA (0.256 mmol, 0.075 mL), HOBT (0.102 mmol, 0.010 mg), and BOP (0.102 mmol, 0.075 g) and the reaction mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The reaction mixture was then filtered and the resin washed with DMF (4 mL), MeOH (4 mL), and DCM (4 mL), and allowed to air dry, to yield (CC).
Synthesis of (DD)
To (CC) (0.08 mmol) was added 50% TFA/DCM (2 mL) and the mixture, was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The reaction was filtered and the resin was washed with DCM (10 mL). The solution was then under reduced pressure and the resulting oil was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and evaporated a total of three times to yield (DD).
Synthesis of 5 To a stirred solution of 4 (0.11 mmol, 0.019 g) in MeCN (4 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added (DD) (0.1 mmol), DIEA (2.9 mmol, 0.5 mL), HOBT (0.2 mmol, 0.032g), and HBTU (0.23 mmol, 0.087 g) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was then diluted with sat NaHCO3 (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with satd. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was purified by flash chromatography using 25 to 55% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to afford 5 (12.0 mg).
Scheme 6: Synthesis of Example 6
Figure imgf000081_0001
(BB) (EE)
Figure imgf000081_0002
Synthesis of (EE)
To (BB) (0.06 mmol) was added DMF (2 mL), Cbz-D-Leu-OH (0.12 mmol, 0.032 g), DIEA (0.256 mmol, 0.075 mL), HOBT (0.102 mmol, 0.010 mg), and BOP (0.102 mmol, 0.075 g) and the reaction mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes.
The reaction mixture was then filtered and the resin washed with DMF (4 mL), MeOH (4 mL), and DCM (4 mL), and allowed to air dry, to yield (EE).
Synthesis of (FF) To (FF) (0.08 mmol) was added 50% TFA/DCM (2 mL) and the mixture was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The reaction was filtered and the resin washed with DCM (10 mL). The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting oil was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and evaporated a total of three times to yield (FF).
Synthesis of 6
To a stirred solution of 4 (0.11 mmol, 0.019 g) in MeCN (4 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added (FF) (0.1 mmol), DIEA (2.9 mmol, 0.5 mL), HOBT (0.2 mmol, 0.032g), and HBTU (0.23 mmol, 0.087 g) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was then diluted with sat NaHCO3 (15 mL) and . extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with satd. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over MgSO-), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was then purified by flash chromatography using 25 to 55% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to afford 20 (14.0 mg).
Scheme 7: Synthesis of Example 7
Figure imgf000082_0001
Synthesis of 7
To a stirred solution of 4 (0.11 mmol, 0.019 g) in MeCN (4 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added (R) (0.1 mmol), DIEA (2.9 mmol, 0.5 mL), HOBT (0.2 mmol, 0.032g), and HBTU (0.23 mmol, 0.087 g) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was then diluted with satd. NaHCO3 (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with satd. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was purified by flash chromatography using 25 to 55% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent to afford 7 (10.5 mg). Scheme 8: Synthesis of Example 8
Figure imgf000083_0001
Synthesis of (HH)
To a solution of dimethyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride (331 mg, 3.4 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) at 0 °C was added triethylamine (343 mg, 3.4 mmol) dropwise. The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 20 minutes.
To a solution of Cbz-HomoPhe-OH (1.0 g, 3.2 mmol) in DCM (100 mL) at 00C was added IBCF (460 mg, 3.35 mmol) dropwise, followed by the dropwise addition of NMM (343 mg, 3.4 mmol). The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 10 minutes and then added to the previously prepared dimethyl hydroxylamine HC1/TEA solution. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 3 hrs followed by the addition of water (50 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (3 x 100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with IN HCl (30 mL) and brine (30 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was then purified by flash chromatography using EtOAc/hexanes (1 :3) as the eluent to yield intermediate (HH) (0.92 g).
Synthesis of (II)
To a solution of (HH) (920 mg, 2.6 mmol) in THF (50 mL) at -20 0C was added a solution of isopropenyl magnesium bromide (26 mL, 12.9 mmol, 0.5 M in THF). The resulting solution was allowed to stir at 0 0C for 6 hours followed by the addition of IN HCl (10 mL). The resulting mixture was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake was washed with ethyl acetate. The layers were separated and aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 20 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with satd. NaHCO3 (30 mL) and brine (30 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was purified by flash chromatography using EtOAc/hexanes (1 :3) as the eluent to yield (II) (700 mg).
Synthesis of (JJ) and (KK)
To a solution of (II) (700 mg, 2.1 mmol) in DCM (50 mL) at 0 0C was added CeCl3'7H2O (942 mg, 2.52 mmol) and NaBH4 (98 mg, 2.52 mmol) successively. The solution was stirred at room temperature overnight followed by the addition of AcOH
(5 mL). The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and then diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) and satd. NaHCO3 (50 mL). The aqueous layer was then extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a yellow oil that was purification by flash chromatography using EtOAc/hexanes (1:3) as the eluent to yield (JJ) and (KK) in a 5/1 ratio.
Synthesis of (LL) and (MM)
To a solution of (JJ) and (KK) in THF (50 mL)at O0C was added VO(acac)2 (18 mg, 0.066 mmol) and t-BuOOH (0.9 mL, 6.0M in decane) successively. The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 10 hours then filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake was washed with EtOAc (100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with satd. NaHCO3 (10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried over MgSC<4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give (LL) and (MM) (585 mg) in a 5/1 ratio.
Synthesis of (NN) To a solution of Dess-Martin Periodinane (1.40 g, 3.3 mmol) in DMSO (20 mL) at 0 0C was added (LL) and (MM) (585 mg) in DMSO (10 mL). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours, and then diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) and satd. NaHCθ3 (50 mL), the aqueous phase was then extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL), and the combined organic layers were dried over Na2Sθ4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a yellow oil that was purified by flash chromatography using EtOAc/hexanes (2:3) as the eluent to yield (NN) (465 mg).
Synthesis of 8
To a solution of (NN) (290 mg, 0.82 mmol) in TFA (5 mL) was added Pd/C (14 mg, 10%). The resulting mixture was allowed to stir under 1 atmosphere H2 for 2 hrs, and was then diluted with DCM (10 mL). The mixture was filtered through Celite 521 and the filter cake washed witfi DCM (10 mL). The was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue diluted with DCM (10 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was placed under high vacuum for 2 hrs, to yield 8.
Scheme 9: Synthesis of Example 9
Figure imgf000086_0001
Synthesis of(OO) To (K) (0.06 mmol) was added DMF (2 mL), Cbz-Ala-OH (0.12 mmol, 0.032 g), DIEA (0.256 mmol, 0.075 mL), HOBT (0.102 mmol, 0.010 mg), and BOP (0.102 mmol, 0.075 g) and the reaction mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The reaction mixture was then filtered and the resin washed with DMF (4 mL), MeOH (4 mL), and DCM (4 mL), and allowed to air dry, to yield (OO). Synthesis of (PP)
To (OO) (0.08 mmol) was added 50% TFA/DCM (2 mL) and the mixture was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The reaction was then filtered and the resin washed with DCM (10 mL). The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting oil was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and evaporated a total of three times to yield (PP).
Synthesis of 9
To a stirred solution of 8 (0.1 1 mmol, 0.019 g) in MeCN (4 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added (PP) (0.1 mmol), DlEA (2.9 mmol, 0.5 mL), HOBT (0.2 mmol, 0.032 g), and HBTU (0.23 mmol, 0.087 g) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was then diluted with satd. NaHCO3 (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was then washed with satd. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting material was purified by flash chromatography using 25 to 55% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluent, to afford 9 (7.8 mg).
Scheme 10: Synthesis of Example 10
Figure imgf000087_0001
(QQ)
Figure imgf000087_0002
(SS) 10
Synthesis of (QQ)
To a solution of Cbz-Asp (t-Bu)-OH (0.32 mmol, 108 mg) in DMF (2 mL) at 0 0C was added HOBT (0.51 mmol, 78 mg), HBTU (0.51 mmol, 194 mg), and DIEA (1.2 mmol, 0.2 mL). Once the resulting mixture became a homogenous solution, Phe- HMPB-BHA resin (0.13 mmol, 200 mg) was added and the resulting reaction mixture was allowed to shake at 0~4 0C overnight. The resin was filtered off and washed with DMF (3x 5 mL) and DCM (3 x 5 mL). The resin was allowed to air dry to yield (QQ).
Synthesis of (RR)
To (QQ) (0.13 mmol) was added TFA/DCM (5 mL, 5:95) and the mixture was allowed to shake at 0~4 0C for 30 minutes. The reaction was then filtered and the resin washed with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure at 0 0C to yield (RR).
Synthesis of (SS)
To a 0 0C solution of (RR) (0.13 mmol) and 4 (0.12 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was added HOBT (0.18 mmol, 31 mg), HBTU (0.18 mmol, 76 mg) and DIEA (0.6 mmol, 0.1 mL), and the resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 0~4°C overnight. The reaction mixture was then diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) and satd. NaHCO3, and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a yellow oil that was purifed by HPLC, eluting with an MeCN/aq. NH4OAc solution, to give (SS).
Synthesis of 10
To a 0 0C solution of (SS) in DCM (5 mL) was added TFA acid (5 mL) dropwise and the resulting solution was stirred for 3 hrs. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by HPLC, eluting with an MeCN/aq. NH4OAc solution, to give 10.
Scheme 11: Synthesis of Example 11
Figure imgf000089_0001
Synthesis of (TT) To a 0 0C solution of Z-AIa-OH (0.32 mmol, 71 rag) in DMF (2 mL) was added
HOBT (0.51 mmol, 78 mg), HBTU (0.51 mmol, 194 mg) and diisopropylethylamine (1.2 mmol, 0.2 mL). Once the resulting mixture became homogenous, Phe(4-MeO)- Wang-resin (0.13 mmol, 200 mg) was added and the resulting reaction mixture was allowed to shake overnight. The resin was then filtered off and washed with DMF (3 x 5 mL) and DCM (3 x 5 mL). The resulting resin was allowed to air dry to yield (TT).
Synthesis of (UU)
To (TT) (0.13 mmol) was added 50% TFA/DCM (5 mL) and the mixture was allowed to shake for 30 minutes. The reaction was then filtered and the resin washed with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure to yield (UU).
Synthesis of U
To a 0 0C solution of (UU) (0.13 mmol) and 4 (0.12 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was added HOBT (0.18 mmol, 31 mg), HBTU (0.18 mmol, 76 mg) and DIEA (O.όmmol, 0.1 mL). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 0—40C overnight followed by dilution with EtOAc (100 mL) and satd. NaHCO3. The aqueous phase was then extracted with EtOAc and the combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO-), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a yellow oil that was purified by HPLC, eluting with an MeCN/aq. NH4OAc solution, to give 11.
Scheme 12: Synthesis of Example 12
Figure imgf000090_0001
Synthesis of 12
To a 0 0C solution of (VV) (0.18 mmol, 50 mg) and 4 (0.12 mmol) in THF (5 raL) was added HOBT (0.18 mmol, 31 mg), HBTU (0.18 mmol, 76 mg) and DIEA (O.όmmol, 0.1 mL). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 0—40C overnight followed by dilution with EtOAc (100 mL) and satd. NaHCO3. The aqueous layer was then extracted with EtOAc, and the combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a yellow oil that was purified by HPLC, eluting with an MeCN/aq. NH4OAc solution, to provide 12.
Scheme 13: Synthesis of Example 13
»
Fmoc HBTU.
Figure imgf000091_0001
Fmoc
H S
Figure imgf000091_0002
Figure imgf000091_0003
Synthesis of (WW)
To a solution of Fmoc-O-t-butyl-L-tyrosine (6.4 mmol, 2.94 g) in DCM (22 mL) was added 1-methylimidazole (4.8 mmol, 0.380 mL) and the mixture was stirred until the solution was homogenous, at which time l-(mesitylene-2-sulfonyl)-3-nitro- 1 ,2,4-triazole (MSNT) (6.4 mmol, 1.9 g) was added. Once the MSNT had dissolved, the reaction mixture was added to HMPB-BHA resin (1.28 mmol, 2 g) and the resulting mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The resin was filtered and washed with DMF (50 mL), MeOH (50 mL), and DCM (50 mL). The resin was then allowed to air dry to provide (WW). Synthesis of (XX)
To (WW) (0.40 mmol, 0.62 g) was added 20% piperidine/DMF (50 mL) and the resulting mixture was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (20 mL), MeOH (20 mL), and DCM (20 mL) and allowed to air dry before subjecting it to the above reaction condition a second time. To the resulting resin was added DMF (64 mL), Fmoc- AIa-OH (32 mmol, 1.05 g), DIEA (12.8 mmol, 2.2 mL), HOBT (5.12 mmol, 692 mg), and HBTU (5.12 mmol, 1.94 g) and the reaction mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The reaction mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (40 mL), DCM (40 mL), MeOH (40 mL), H2O (40 mL) MeOH (40 mL), H2O (40 mL), MeOH (40 mL), and DCM (40 mL), and allowed to air dry, to yield (XX).
Synthesis of (YY)
To (XX) (0.192 mmol, 0.3 g) was added 20% piperidine/DMF (10 mL) and the resulting mixture was allowed to shake for 20 minutes. The mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (20 mL), MeOH (20 mL), and DCM (20 mL) and allowed to air dry before subjecting it to the above reaction condition a second time.
To the resulting resin was added DMF (12 mL), morpholino acetic acid (0.48 mmol, 70 mg), DIEA (1.92 mmol, 334 μL), HOBT (0.768 mmol, 104 mg), and HBTU (0.768 mmol, 291 mg) and the reaction mixture was allowed to shake for 45 minutes. The reaction mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DMF (40 mL), DCM (40 mL), MeOH (40 mL), H2O (40 mL), MeOH (40 mL) H2O (40 mL), MeOH (40 mL), and DCM (40 mL), and allowed to air dry, to yield (YY). Synthesis of (ZZ)
To (YY) (0.192 mmol) was added 5% TFA/DCM (10 mL) and the mixture was allowed to shake for 10 minutes at 00C. The reaction mixture was filtered and the resin was washed with DCM (10 mL). The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting oil was diluted with DCM (10 mL) and evaporated a total of three times to yield (ZZ).
Synthesis of 13
To a stirred solution of (ZZ) (0.192 mmol, 83 mg) in MeCN (6 mL) and DMF (2 mL) was added 4 (0.384 mmol, 79 mg), DIEA (0.768 mmol, 133 μL), HOBT (0.3 mmol, 41 mg), and HBTU (0.3 mmol, 116 mg) and the mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 2 hours. The reaction was diluted with sat NaHCO3 (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x). The organic layer was washed with sat. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting crude material was purified by flash chromatography using EtOAc then EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (98/1/1) as the eluent to afford 13 as a white solid that was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z:
623.80).
Scheme 14: Synthesis of Example 14
Figure imgf000094_0001
Synthesis of (AAA)
A suspension of Boc-Tyr(Me)-OH (10 g) in anhydrous dichlormethane (450 mL) was cooled to -5 0C in an ice/acetone bath. To this suspension was added triethylamine (9.4 mL, 67.8 mmol) and DMAP (600 mg). A solution of benzylchloroformate (5.7 mL, 40.6 mmol) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was then added dropwise. The resulting solution was allowed to stir at -5 0C for three hours, and then allowed to warm to room temperature. A solution of saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (200 mL) was then added. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was washed with dichloromethane (200 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography using 80% hexanes/ 20% ethyl acetate to provide 11.43 g of a white solid. (88% yield) which was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 386.42).
Boc-Tyr(Me)-OBn (2 g, 5.2 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (15 mL) and cooled to 0 0C followed by dropwise addition of TFA (15 mL). The reaction was allowed to warm to room temp and was stirred for 2 hours. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to yield (AAA) as a clear oil (1.4 g, 95% yield) which was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 286.42) and was used without further purification.
Synthesis of (BBB) To a 0 °C solution of Boc-Ala-OH (750 mg, 3.9 mmol), H-Tyr(Me)-OBn (950 mg, 3.3 mmol), HOBT (712 mg, 5.3 mmol) and HBTU (2.Og, 5.3mmol) in acetonitrile (60 mL) and DMF (6 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (2.3 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 2 hours and was then diluted with ethyl acetate (300 mL) and washed with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (2 x 100 mL) and brine (100 mL). The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield an opaque oil that was purified by silica gel column chromatography using 50% hexanes/ 50% ethyl acetate to yield 600 mg of (BBB) as a white foam (40% yield) that was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 457.52). Synthesis of (CCC)
To a 0 0C solution of (BBB) (5.9 g, 12.9 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (120 mL) was added 10 % Pd/C (1.2 g) and the resulting mixture was allowed to stir under 1 atmosphere of hydrogen for 2 hours. The mixture was then filtered through Celite-545 and the filter cake was washed with tetrahydrofuran. The organic filtrate was then concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum to provide 4.53 g (95% yield) of (CCC) that was used without further purification. Synthesis of (DDD)
To a 0 0C solution of (CCC) (4 g, 10.9 mmol), 4 (2.23 g, 10.9 mmol), HOBT (2.36 g, 17.4 mmol) and HBTU (6.6 g, 17.4 mmol) in acetonitrile (200 mL) and DMF (5 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (7.6 mL) and the mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 2 hours. It was then diluted with ethyl acetate (400 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2 x 100 mL) and brine (100 mL). The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by HPLC (aqueous ammonium acetate (0.02 M) and acetonitrile) to provide (DDD) (4.47 g, 74% yield) as characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 554.79).
Synthesis of (EEE)
To a 0 0C solution of (DDD) (2 g, 3.6 mmol) in dichloromethane (32 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (8 mL), and the resulting solution was stirred at that temperature for another hour. The solution was then concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum to provide (EEE) as confirmed by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 454.72) that was used without further purification.
Synthesis of 14
To a 0 0C solution of (EEE), morpholin-4-yl-acetic acid (1.048 g, 7.22 mmol), HOBT (780 mg, 5.76 mmol) and HBTU (2.2 g, 5.76 mmol) in acetonitrile (60 mL) and DMF (3 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (2.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 2 hours and was then diluted with ethyl acetate (300 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2 x 100 mL) and brine (100 mL). The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by HPLC (aqueous ammonium acetate (0.02 M) and acetonitrile) to provide 14 (620 mg, 29% yield) which was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 581.83). Scheme 15: Synthesis of Example 15
Figure imgf000097_0001
To a 0 0C solution of (EEE) (65 mg, 0.144 mmol), (2R,6S)-2,6- dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)acetic acid hydrochloride (FFF) (50 mg, 0.288 mmol), HOBT (32 mg, 0.23 mmol) and HBTU (88 mg, 0.23 mmol) in acetonitrile (15 mL) and DMF (1 mL), was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (100 μL) dropwise and the mixture was stirred at 00C for 2 hours. It was then diluted with ethyl acetate (30 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2 x 15 mL) and brine (15 mL). The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue that was purified by HPLC (aqueous ammonium acetate (0.02 M) and acetonitrile) to provide 15 (32 mg, 36% yield) as characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 609.83).
Scheme 16: Synthesis of Example 16
Figure imgf000097_0002
To a 0 °C solution of (EEE) (62 mg, 0.14 mmol), (2-methyl-l,3-thiazol-5- yl)acetic acid (GGG) (25 mg, 0.15 mmol), HOBT (30 mg, 0.22 mmol) and HBTU (84 mg, 0.22 mmol) in acetonitrile (15 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added N,N- diisopropylethylamine (143 μL) dropwise and the resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 2 hours. It was then diluted with ethyl acetate (30 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2 x 15 mL) and brine (15 mL). The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue that was purified by HPLC (aqueous ammonium acetate (0.02 M) and acetonitrile) to provide 16 that was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 593.72).
Scheme 17: Synthesis of Example 17
Figure imgf000098_0001
Synthesis of (III)
To a 0 °C solution of (HHH) (2 g, 5.9 mmol), 4 (2.44 g, 1 1.89 mmol), HOBT (1.28 g, 9.5 mmol) and HBTU (3.6 g, 9.5 mmol) in acetonitrile (180 mL) and DMF (10 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (4.14 mL) dropwise and the mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 2 hours. It was then diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL) and washed with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (2 x 50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue that was purified by HPLC (aqueous ammonium acetate (0.02 M) and acetonitrile) to provide (III) (1.5 g, 50% yield) as characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 524.71).
Synthesis of (JJJ)
To a 0 0C solution of (III) (60 mg, 0.1 mmol) in dichloromethane (2 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.5 mL), and the resulting solution was stirred at that temperature for another hour. The solution was then concentrated under reduced pressure and placed under high vacuum to provide (JJJ) as confirmed by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 424.51) that was used without further purification.
Synthesis of 17 To a 0 °C solution of (JJJ), (2,4-dimethyl-l,3-thiazol-5-yl-acetic acid (40 mg,
0.23 mmol), HOBT (25 mg, 0.183 mmol) and HBTU (70 mg, 0.183 mmol) in acetonitrile (6 mL) and DMF (1 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (80 μL) dropwise. The mixture was then stirred at 0 0C for 2 hours. It was then diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2 x 10 mL) and brine (10 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue that was purified by HPLC (aqueous ammonium acetate (0.02 M) and acetonitrile) to provide 17 (29 mg, 44% yield) which was characterized by LC/MS (LCRS (MH) m/z: 577.86).
Example 18: Assays to Determine Inhibitory Preference There are three types of assays that can be utilized when determining whether or not a molecule preferentially inhibits the CT-L activity of the constitutive or immunoproteasome. Enzyme kinetic assays such as those disclosed in U.S. application serial number 09/569748, Example 2 and Stein et al., Biochem. (1996), 35, 3899-3908 use isolated 2OS proteasome preps with greater than 90% constitutive proteasome subunits or immunoproteasome subunits. The inhibitory preference of the molecule is then based on the EC50 ratio of the chymotryptic-like activity of the constitutive proteasome to that of the immunoproteasome (2OS ratio).
Alternatively, the CT-L EC50 of a compound can be determined using 26S proteasome in the context of a cell lysate. Compound is added to iysate generated from cells that either predominantly express constitutive proteasome (e.g., HT29) or immunoproteasome (e.g., THPl). Again, the inhibitory preference is then based on the EC50 ratio (Lysate ratio).
Lastly, a more cell-based approach can be utilized. Cells expressing approximately equivalent amounts of immuno- and constitutive proteasome (e.g., RPMI-8226) are treated with test compound, followed by the method for determining the activity of a proteasome inhibitor as described in application serial number 11/254541. The ratio of the EC50 generated in the ELISA-based assay using β5 antibody and LMP7 antibodies (ELISA ratio) provides the basis for determining the inhibitory preference of the test compound. In all instances, a ratio of one indicates that the molecule works equally well at inhibiting the CT-L activity of both forms of proteasome. In all three assays, a ratio of less than one denotes the molecule inhibits the CT-L activity of the constitutive proteasome better than that of the immunoproteasome. Ratios greater than one signifies the molecule inhibits chymotrypsin-like activity of the immunoproteasome better than that of the constitutive proteasome.
Example 19: ELISA assay
A suitable ELISA assay may be found in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 1 1/254541 , incorporated herein in its entirety. Briefly, RPMI-8226 cells were treated with 0.1 nM to 1 μM of proteasome Inhibitor B. The samples were then washed with phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) and lysed in hypotonic buffer (20 mM Tris pH 8, 5 mM EDTA) (Tris-HCl and EDTA are available from Teknova, Inc., Hollister, CA). Cellular debris was removed by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm in a micro fuge (4 °C) for 2 min. The supernatant was transferred to a fresh tube, snap frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at -80 0C. After thawing on ice, the samples (30 μl for assays run in triplicate) were treated with 500 nM of Inhibitor A for 1 hr at room temperature.
Following treatment with Inhibitor A, the lysate was denatured by addition of seven volumes of 1% SDS (210 μl) (available from Bio-Rad, Hercules, CA) and heating at 99 °C with vigorous shaking for 5 min. The sample was allowed to cool and two volumes (60 μl) of 10% Triton X-100 (available from Bio-Rad, Hercules, CA) was added.
Figure imgf000101_0001
Inhibitor A Inhibitor B
Streptavidin sepharose beads (6.5 μl/well) (available from Amersham Biosciences, Piscataway, NJ), were washed three times with 1 ml PBS (available from Mediatech, Inc., Herndon, VA) in a microcentrifuge tube. The beads were resuspended in ELISA wash/block buffer (PBS + 0.1% Tween 20 + 1% bovine serum albumin; 20 μl/well) and transferred to the wells of a 96 well filter plate (BSA is available from Sigma, St. Louis, MO; Tween is available from Calbiochem, San Diego, CA). Denatured whole blood or PBMC lysates that were treated with Inhibitor 3 were added to the filter plate wells containing the streptavidin sepharose beads (each sample assayed in triplicate) and incubated for 1 hr at room temperature with shaking (MultiScreen-DV Opaque Plates with low protein binding durapore membrane; available from Millipore, Billerica, MA). The unbound material was removed by gentle filtration and the beads were washed six times with ELISA wash/block buffer (200μl each).
Primary antibody to human 2OS proteasome subunit β5 (rabbit polyclonal antibody; available from Biomol, Plymouth Meeting, PA) or human 2OS immunoproteasome subunit LMP7 (rabbit polyclonal antibody; available from Affinity BioReagents, Golden, CO) was diluted 1 : 1000 in ELISA wash/block buffer, added to the beads (100 μl/well), and incubated for 1 hr at room temperature on an orbital shaker. The beads were washed six times with ELISA wash/block buffer with gentle filtration. Secondary antibody treatment (1 :5000) and washing are as described for primary antibody (goat anti-rabbit antibody-HRP conjugate; available from Biosource, Camarillo, CA). The beads were then resuspended in 100 μl chemiluminescent detection reagent (Super Signal Pico Chemiluminescent Substrate™; available from
Pierce, Rockford, IL) and luminescence was read on a Tecan plate reader. Occupation of the active sites of the proteasome with the peptide epoxyketone inhibitor results in both a decrease in chymotryptic-like catalytic activity and a decrease in binding of the biotinylated probe (Inhibitor A). These data suggest that the ELISA- based assay using the biontinylated probe accurately reflects the inhibitory activity of Inhibitor B.
An exemplary feature of the ELISA-based PD assay is that it permits differentiation between constitutive proteasome inhibition (β5) and immunoproteasome inhibition (LMP7) because it utilizes subunit-specific antibodies.
Utilizing a different active site probe (Inhibitor C) expands the utility of the ELISA-based assay for measuring the occupation of multiple constitutive (β5, βl, β2) and immunoproteasome (LMP7, LMP2) active sites in 8226 multiple myeloma cell line that co-expresses both forms of proteasome. The expanded active site assay can be used to measure relative inhibitor selectivity both between the immuno- and constitutive proteasomes as well as among the three active sites of each proteasome. In addition, the ELISA-based assay is able to determine the potency and selectivity of other classes of proteasome inhibitors, including the peptide boronic acid-based inhibitors.
Figure imgf000102_0001
Inhibitor C To conduct a pharmacodynamic evaluation of an inhibitor, whole blood and
PBMC samples are collected prior to dosing and at multiple time-points after dosing. Lysates are prepared and protein concentration assays performed to normalize for total protein in each lysate. The level of inhibitor binding to β5 and LMP7 subunits in whole blood and PBMCRPMI-8226 cells, respectively, is determined by the streptavi din-capture ELlSA described above. Standard curves with purified constitutive proteasome and immunoproteasome are utilized to ensure assay linearity/dynamic range and to convert the chemiluminescence signal to an absolute amount (μg) of subunit bound. The ratio of the EC50 generated in the ELISA-based assay using β5 antibody and LMP7 antibodies (ELISA ratio) provides the basis for determining the inhibitory preference of the test compound. The above inhibitor (B) has a ratio greater than 20, thus, it is much more selective at inhibiting the chymotryptic-like activity associated with the immunoproteasome.
To determine the level of proteasome inhibition for a given patient, the amount of β5 or LMP7 detected in the post-dose sample is compared to the pre-dose sample. Proteasome inhibition is determined after a single dose or after a cycle of dosing, or is used to monitor inhibition shortly after dosing as well as to monitor recovery of proteasome activity after a course of dosing.
Example 20: Biological Results
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000105_0001
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000107_0001
Figure imgf000108_0001
Figure imgf000109_0001
Figure imgf000110_0001
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure imgf000112_0001
Example 21: Use of Immunoproteasome Inhibitor in Rheumatoid Arthritis Model
The effect of Compound 14 on disease progression was assessed in 2 mouse models of rheumatoid arthritis (Figure 2). In the arthro genie antibody model, in which disease is induced by the administration of anti-collagen antibodies and Hpopolysaccharide (LPS) (Terato et al., J Immunol 148:2103-2108, 1992), Compound 14 inhibited disease progression in a dose dependent manner (Figure 2A). Rhematoid arthritis was induced on Day 0 in female Balb/c mice by IV administration of anti-type II collagen antibodies followed 3 days later by LPS. Compound X was administered IV 3 times/week for 2 weeks beginning on Day 4, the first day animals showed evidence of disease. Per mouse, each paw was measured for disease using a scale of 0 — 4 and a total clinical score was assigned for each animal (max score = 16). Administration of 6 mg/kg of Compound 14 reduced disease severity by ~50% while the 20 mg/kg dose level inhibited the disease by greater than 75%. The effect administration of Compound 14 on disease progress was also assessed in an alternative mouse model for RA, in which disease develops 21 — 30 days after immunization with bovine type II collagen (Kagari et al., J Immunol 169:1459- 1466, 2002). Administration of 6 or 20 mg/kg Compound 14 beginning after first signs of disease inhibited disease progression as compared to vehicle control (Figure 2 B). Again, disease progression was measured using a total clinical score of paw condition per mouse. As seen previously, increasing amounts of Compound 14 resulted in enhanced reduction of disease severity.
Equivalents Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, numerous equivalents to the compounds and methods of use thereof described herein. Such equivalents are considered to be within the scope of this invention and are covered by the following claims.
All of the above-cited references and publications are hereby incorporated by reference.

Claims

We Claim:
1. A compound having a structure of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
Figure imgf000114_0001
(I) wherein each Ar is independently an aromatic or heteroaromatic group optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents; each A is independently selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2; or
A is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of Z;
B is absent or is N(R9)R10;
L is absent or is selected from C=O, C=S, and SO2;
M is absent or is
Figure imgf000114_0002
Q is absent or is selected from O, NH, and N-C|.6alkyl;
X is selected from O, S, NH, and N-Ci-6alkyl;
Y is absent or is selected from C=O and SO2; each Z is independently selected from O, S, NH, and
Figure imgf000114_0003
or
Z is optionally a covalent bond when adjacent to an occurrence of A; R1 is selected from H, -Ci-6alkyl-B, Cι-6hydroxyalkyl, Ci.ήalkoxyalkyl, aryl, and Ci- βaralkyl;
R2 and R3 are each independently selected from aryl,
Figure imgf000114_0004
heteroaryl, and Ci- eheteroaralkyl;
R4 is N(R5)L-Q-R6; R5 is selected from hydrogen, OH,
Figure imgf000115_0001
and Ci-βalkyl;
R6 is selected from hydrogen,
Figure imgf000115_0002
Ci-ealkenyl, Ci-βalkynyl, Ar-Y-, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, an N-terminal protecting group, aryl, Ci_6aralkyl, heteroaryl, Q- βheteroaralkyl, R"ZAZ-C,.8alkyl-, Rl4Z-C|-galkyl-, (R110)(R12O)PC=O)O-C1 - 8alkyl-ZAZ-C1-8alkyl-, R1 ' ZAZ-C ,-8alkyl-ZAZ-Ci-8alkyl-, heterocyclylMZAZ-
Cβalkyl-, (R11O)(R12O)P(=O)O-C,-8alkyl-, (Rl 3)2N-CM2alkyl-, (R13J3N+-C1- !2alkyl-, heterocyclylM-, carbocyclylM-, R14SO2Ci_8alkyl-, and R14SO2NH; or
R5 and R6 together are Ci^alkyl-Y-Ci^alkyl, Ci-6alkyl-ZAZ-C|.6alkyl, ZAZ-C ι-6alkyl- ZAZ-C|-6alkyl, ZAZ-C i-6alkyl-Z AZ, or Ci-6alkyl-A, thereby forming a ring; R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, and Ci-6aralkyl; R9 is selected from hydrogen, OH, and Ci.βalkyl; and R10 is an N-terminal protecting group;
R11 and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen, metal cation, Ci^alkyl, C1. όalkenyl, C|_6alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000115_0003
and C|.6heteroaralkyl; each R is independently selected from hydrogen and Ci^alkyl; and
R14 is independently selected from hydrogen, Ci-6alkyl,
Figure imgf000115_0004
carbocyJune 12, 2007clyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, Ci_6aralkyl, and Ci- βheteroaralkyl;
R15 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-βalkyl,
Figure imgf000115_0005
Ci-βalkoxy, -C(O)OCi-6alkyl, -C(O)NHC, ^alkyl, and C1-6aralkyl; provided that in any occurrence of the sequence ZAZ, at least one member of the sequence must be other than a covalent bond.
2. A compound of claim 1, wherein R7 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen and Ci.βalkyl.
3. A compound of claim 2, wherein R7 and R8 are both hydrogen.
4. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein R is selected from
C|-6alkyl and C|-6hydroxyalkyl.
5. A compound of claim 4, wherein R15 is selected from methyl, ethyl, hydroxym ethyl, and 2-hydroxyethyl.
6. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein R5 is hydrogen.
7. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein L and Q are absent.
8. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein R6 is an N-terminal protecting group.
9. A compound of claim 8, wherein R6 is selected from t-butoxycarbonyl and benzyloxycarbonyl.
10. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the carbon bearing R1 has a D stereochemical configuration.
11. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein R1 is selected from -Ci-salkylB and C|.6aralkyl.
12. A compound of claim 11, wherein R1 is selected from methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, carboxymethyl, and benzyl.
13. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein R2 is selected from
Ci-βaralkyl and Ci-gheteroaralkyl.
14. A compound of claim 13, wherein R2 is selected from Ci-ήalkyl-phenyl, C|.6alkyl-indolyl, Ci-βalkyl-thienyl,
Figure imgf000116_0001
and
Figure imgf000116_0002
15. A compound of claim 14, wherein R2 is selected from
Figure imgf000117_0002
Figure imgf000117_0004
Figure imgf000117_0003
wherein D is selected from hydrogen, methoxy, t-butoxy, hydroxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, and
Figure imgf000117_0005
and
R is hydrogen or a suitable protecting group.
16. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein R3 is selected from Ci-βaralkyl and Ci-βheteroaralkyl.
17. A compound of claim 16, wherein R3 is selected from
Figure imgf000117_0006
and Cι-6alkyl-indolyl.
18. A compound of claim 17, wherein R3 is selected from
Figure imgf000117_0007
wherein D is selected from hydrogen, methoxy, t-butoxy, hydroxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, and
Figure imgf000117_0008
and
R is hydrogen or a suitable protecting group.
19. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein R6 is selected from heteroaryl and Ci^heteroaralkyl.
20. A compound of claim 19, wherein R6 is heteroaryl.
21. A compound of claim 20, wherein R6 is selected from pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, isoxazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine.
22. A compound of claim 19, wherein R is Ci^heteroaralkyl.
23. A compound of claim 22, wherein R6 is selected from pyrrol ylmethyl, furanylmethyl, thienylmethyl, imidazolylmethyl, isoxazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, oxadiazolylmethyl, thiazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, triazolylmethyl, pyrazolylmethyl, pyridylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, pyridazinylmethyl and pyrimidinylmethyl.
24. A method for the treatment of an immune-related disease, comprising administering a compound of any one of claims 1 to 23.
25. A method for the treatment of cancer, comprising administering a compound of any one of claims 1 to 23.
26. A method for the treatment of inflammation, comprising administering a compound of any one of claims 1 to 23.
27. A method for treating infection, comprising administering a compound of any one of claims 1 to 23.
28. A method for treating proliferative disease, comprising administering a compound of any one of claims 1 to 23.
29. A method for treating neurodegenerative disease, compromising administering a compound of any one of claims 1 to 23.
30. A compound of claim 1, wherein an EC50 ratio of the compound in an assay of constitutive proteasome activity as compared to the EC50 of the compound in an assay of immunoproteasome activity is greater than 1.0.
31. A compound of claim 30, wherein the EC50 ratio is greater than 3.0.
32. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent and a compound of any one of claims 1 to 23.
PCT/US2007/014427 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for pr0teas0me inhibition WO2007149512A2 (en)

Priority Applications (18)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
BRPI0713309-0A BRPI0713309A2 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 enzyme inhibiting compounds
MX2008016512A MX2008016512A (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for pr0teas0me inhibition.
DK07809745.8T DK2041158T3 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxide ketones for proteasome inhibition
NZ573759A NZ573759A (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
KR1020097000551A KR101441703B1 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
JP2009516564A JP5226679B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Compounds for enzyme inhibition
CN200780030610.4A CN101506224B (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 The peptide epoxy ketone that proteasome suppresses
ES07809745T ES2415632T3 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
AU2007261345A AU2007261345B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
CA2657213A CA2657213C (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
UAA200814605A UA101303C2 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Compounds for proteasome enzyme inhibition
EP07809745.8A EP2041158B1 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
PL07809745T PL2041158T3 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
SI200731257T SI2041158T1 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
IL196064A IL196064A (en) 2006-06-19 2008-12-18 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
HK09108367.9A HK1128702A1 (en) 2006-06-19 2009-09-11 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
IL218033A IL218033A (en) 2006-06-19 2012-02-09 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
PH12012501747A PH12012501747A1 (en) 2006-06-19 2012-09-03 Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US81521806P 2006-06-19 2006-06-19
US60/815,218 2006-06-19

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007149512A2 true WO2007149512A2 (en) 2007-12-27
WO2007149512A3 WO2007149512A3 (en) 2008-02-21

Family

ID=38690245

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2007/014427 WO2007149512A2 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-06-19 Peptide epoxyketones for pr0teas0me inhibition

Country Status (25)

Country Link
US (11) US7691852B2 (en)
EP (2) EP2041158B1 (en)
JP (2) JP5226679B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101441703B1 (en)
CN (1) CN101506224B (en)
AU (1) AU2007261345B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0713309A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2657213C (en)
CO (1) CO6241190A2 (en)
CY (1) CY1114518T1 (en)
DK (1) DK2041158T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2415632T3 (en)
HK (1) HK1128702A1 (en)
IL (2) IL196064A (en)
MX (1) MX2008016512A (en)
MY (2) MY183014A (en)
NZ (4) NZ573759A (en)
PH (1) PH12012501747A1 (en)
PL (1) PL2041158T3 (en)
PT (1) PT2041158E (en)
RU (2) RU2450016C2 (en)
SI (1) SI2041158T1 (en)
UA (1) UA101303C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2007149512A2 (en)
ZA (2) ZA200810765B (en)

Cited By (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010048298A1 (en) * 2008-10-21 2010-04-29 Proteolix, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
WO2011060179A1 (en) * 2009-11-13 2011-05-19 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc Use of peptide epoxyketones for metastasis suppression
US8080576B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2011-12-20 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8088741B2 (en) 2004-05-10 2012-01-03 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8129346B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-03-06 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8198270B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-06-12 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for proteasome enzyme inhibition
WO2013010018A2 (en) * 2011-07-13 2013-01-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions and methods for inhibiting proteases
US8367617B2 (en) 2007-10-04 2013-02-05 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline peptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors and the synthesis of amino acid keto-epoxides
EP2555621A2 (en) * 2010-04-07 2013-02-13 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline peptide epoxyketone immunoproteasome inhibitor
WO2014152127A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Dipeptide and tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
WO2014152134A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US9051353B2 (en) 2009-03-20 2015-06-09 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
WO2016004917A1 (en) 2014-07-10 2016-01-14 Immunologik Gmbh Substances for the treatment of retroviral infectious diseases
US9878047B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2018-01-30 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs of peptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
EP3330260A1 (en) 2016-12-01 2018-06-06 Enantia, S.L. Process for the preparation of an intermediate for the synthesis of i.a. carfilzomib
US10150794B2 (en) 2005-11-09 2018-12-11 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
WO2019040680A1 (en) 2017-08-23 2019-02-28 Krzar Life Sciences Immunoproteasome inhibitors and immunosuppressive agent in the treatment of autoimmune disorders
EP3362754A4 (en) * 2015-10-15 2019-04-24 Cornell University Proteasome inhibitors and uses thereof
US11202817B2 (en) 2014-08-18 2021-12-21 Cornell University Dipeptidomimetics as inhibitors of human immunoproteasomes
US11203613B2 (en) 2017-10-11 2021-12-21 Cornell University Peptidomimetic proteasome inhibitors
USRE49816E1 (en) 2014-01-10 2024-01-30 Cornell University Dipeptides as inhibitors of human immunoproteasomes

Families Citing this family (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SG183843A1 (en) 2010-03-01 2012-10-30 Onyx Therapeutics Inc Compounds for immunoproteasome inhibition
US8609610B2 (en) * 2011-02-18 2013-12-17 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Inhibitors of the trypsin-like site of the proteasome and methods of use thereof
US20130331381A1 (en) * 2011-02-28 2013-12-12 Mcmaster University Treatment of Cancer WIth Dopamine Receptor Antagonists
JP6176259B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2017-08-09 日産化学工業株式会社 Method for producing stereoselective epoxy ketone compound
CN104797591A (en) * 2012-08-14 2015-07-22 弗洛伊诺制药公司 Fluorinated epoxyketone-based compounds and uses thereof as proteasome inhibitors
US20150266920A1 (en) * 2012-10-12 2015-09-24 Hoff-Mann-La Roche Inc. Macrocyclic ketoamide immunoproteasome inhibitors
CN104174021A (en) * 2013-05-22 2014-12-03 复旦大学附属华山医院 Application of proteasome inhibitors in preparation of medicine for curing chronic lower-grade inflammation diseases
CN105518019A (en) * 2013-09-06 2016-04-20 桑多斯股份公司 Synthesis of peptide epoxy ketones
JP6551825B2 (en) * 2014-02-10 2019-07-31 公立大学法人首都大学東京 Chromatin structure regulator
WO2016022955A1 (en) 2014-08-07 2016-02-11 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Compounds and methods for treating cancer
CN105017181B (en) * 2015-07-02 2017-10-10 南京师范大学 The preparation method of Carfilzomib key intermediate and its derivative
WO2017032487A1 (en) 2015-08-27 2017-03-02 Technische Universität München Proteasome inhibitor comprising a signal-emitting moiety
KR102524751B1 (en) 2016-06-29 2023-04-21 케자르 라이프 사이언스 Preparation method of peptide epoxyketone immunoprotease inhibitor and its precursor
LT3478670T (en) 2016-06-29 2023-05-25 Kezar Life Sciences Crystalline salts of peptide epoxyketone immunoproteasome inhibitor
WO2018160717A1 (en) 2017-02-28 2018-09-07 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Compounds and methods for treating cancer
US11357817B2 (en) 2017-05-15 2022-06-14 The Regents Of The University Of California Immunoproteasome inhibitor
US11243207B2 (en) 2018-03-29 2022-02-08 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Assessing and treating cancer
EP3778869A4 (en) 2018-03-30 2021-12-08 Kyoto University Cardiomyocyte maturation promoter
WO2021108705A2 (en) * 2019-11-25 2021-06-03 Cornell University Nuclear factor kappa b pathway inhibition to arrest calcific aortic stenosis

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1994015956A1 (en) 1993-01-04 1994-07-21 The Wellcome Foundation Limited Endothelin converting enzyme inhibitors
WO1998010779A1 (en) 1996-09-13 1998-03-19 New York University Method for treating parasitic diseases with proteasome inhibitors
WO2005105827A2 (en) 2004-04-15 2005-11-10 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for proteasome enzyme inhibition
WO2005111008A2 (en) 2004-05-10 2005-11-24 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
WO2006099261A2 (en) 2005-03-11 2006-09-21 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Potent and specific immunoproteasome inhibitors
WO2007056464A1 (en) 2005-11-09 2007-05-18 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition

Family Cites Families (84)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4733665C2 (en) 1985-11-07 2002-01-29 Expandable Grafts Partnership Expandable intraluminal graft and method and apparatus for implanting an expandable intraluminal graft
US5135919A (en) 1988-01-19 1992-08-04 Children's Medical Center Corporation Method and a pharmaceutical composition for the inhibition of angiogenesis
US5441944A (en) 1989-04-23 1995-08-15 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Substituted cyclodextrin sulfates and their uses as growth modulating agents
US5071957A (en) 1989-08-04 1991-12-10 Bristol-Myers Company Antibiotic BU-4061T
US4990448A (en) 1989-08-04 1991-02-05 Bristol-Myers Company Bu-4061T
KR0166088B1 (en) * 1990-01-23 1999-01-15 . Derivatives of cyclodextrins exhibiting enhanced aqueous solubility and the use thereof
US5376645A (en) 1990-01-23 1994-12-27 University Of Kansas Derivatives of cyclodextrins exhibiting enhanced aqueous solubility and the use thereof
EP0732399A3 (en) 1990-03-05 1997-03-12 Cephalon Inc Chymotrypsin-like proteases and their inhibitors
US5340736A (en) 1991-05-13 1994-08-23 The President & Fellows Of Harvard College ATP-dependent protease and use of inhibitors for same in the treatment of cachexia and muscle wasting
TW380137B (en) 1994-03-04 2000-01-21 Merck & Co Inc Process for making an epoxide
US5693617A (en) 1994-03-15 1997-12-02 Proscript, Inc. Inhibitors of the 26s proteolytic complex and the 20s proteasome contained therein
US6660268B1 (en) 1994-03-18 2003-12-09 The President And Fellows Of Harvard College Proteasome regulation of NF-KB activity
US6506876B1 (en) 1994-10-11 2003-01-14 G.D. Searle & Co. LTA4 hydrolase inhibitor pharmaceutical compositions and methods of use
US6083903A (en) 1994-10-28 2000-07-04 Leukosite, Inc. Boronic ester and acid compounds, synthesis and uses
DE19505263A1 (en) 1995-02-16 1996-08-22 Consortium Elektrochem Ind Process for the purification of water-soluble cyclodextrin derivatives
US6335358B1 (en) 1995-04-12 2002-01-01 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Lactacystin analogs
US6150415A (en) 1996-08-13 2000-11-21 The Regents Of The University Of California Epoxide hydrolase complexes and methods therewith
EP2314598A1 (en) 1996-10-18 2011-04-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of Hepatitis C virus NS3 serine protease
SI0932617T1 (en) 1996-10-18 2002-06-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hepatitis c virus ns3 protease
US6046177A (en) 1997-05-05 2000-04-04 Cydex, Inc. Sulfoalkyl ether cyclodextrin based controlled release solid pharmaceutical formulations
US5874418A (en) 1997-05-05 1999-02-23 Cydex, Inc. Sulfoalkyl ether cyclodextrin based solid pharmaceutical formulations and their use
JP4439596B2 (en) 1997-06-13 2010-03-24 サイデクス ファーマシューティカルズ、 インク． Pharmaceutical composition containing polar drug or polar prodrug having long shelf life, and method for producing the same
US6133308A (en) 1997-08-15 2000-10-17 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Synthesis of clasto-lactacystin beta-lactone and analogs thereof
US6075150A (en) 1998-01-26 2000-06-13 Cv Therapeutics, Inc. α-ketoamide inhibitors of 20S proteasome
US6099851A (en) 1998-06-02 2000-08-08 Weisman; Kenneth M. Therapeutic uses of leuprolide acetate
US6838436B1 (en) 1998-07-10 2005-01-04 Osteoscreen Inc. Inhibitors of proteasomal activity for stimulating bone growth
US6902721B1 (en) 1998-07-10 2005-06-07 Osteoscreen, Inc. Inhibitors of proteasomal activity for stimulating bone growth
US6462019B1 (en) * 1998-07-10 2002-10-08 Osteoscreen, Inc. Inhibitors of proteasomal activity and production for stimulating bone growth
US6204257B1 (en) * 1998-08-07 2001-03-20 Universtiy Of Kansas Water soluble prodrugs of hindered alcohols
AU762373B2 (en) * 1998-10-20 2003-06-26 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for monitoring proteasome inhibitor drug action
US6492333B1 (en) * 1999-04-09 2002-12-10 Osteoscreen, Inc. Treatment of myeloma bone disease with proteasomal and NF-κB activity inhibitors
US6831099B1 (en) * 1999-05-12 2004-12-14 Yale University Enzyme inhibition
JP2003528039A (en) 1999-10-20 2003-09-24 オステオスクリーン，インコーポレイテッド Inhibitors of proteasome activity to stimulate bone and hair growth
CA2425632A1 (en) 2000-10-12 2002-04-18 Viromics Gmbh Agents for the treatment of viral infections
CA2435124A1 (en) 2001-01-25 2002-08-01 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Formulation of boronic acid compounds
DE60218153T2 (en) 2001-05-21 2007-06-28 Alcon Inc. USE OF PROTEASOME INHIBITORS FOR THE TREATMENT OF DRY EYES
WO2003033506A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2003-04-24 Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Aminoborane acid derivative and proteasome inhibitory drug containing the same
AU2003219652A1 (en) 2002-01-08 2003-07-30 Eisai Co. Ltd. Eponemycin and epoxomicin analogs and uses thereof
US20040116329A1 (en) 2002-01-29 2004-06-17 Epstein Stephen E. Inhibition of proteasomes to prevent restenosis
AU2003220685A1 (en) * 2002-04-09 2003-10-27 Greenville Hospital System Metastasis modulating activity of highly sulfated oligosaccharides
US7968569B2 (en) 2002-05-17 2011-06-28 Celgene Corporation Methods for treatment of multiple myeloma using 3-(4-amino-1-oxo-1,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)-piperidine-2,6-dione
US20030224469A1 (en) * 2002-06-03 2003-12-04 Buchholz Tonia J. Methods and kits for assays utilizing fluorescence polarization
WO2003101481A1 (en) 2002-06-03 2003-12-11 Als Therapy Development Foundation Treatment of neurodegenerative diseases using proteasome modulators
AU2003256847A1 (en) 2002-07-26 2004-02-16 Advanced Research And Technology Institute At Indiana University Method of treating cancer
US7189740B2 (en) 2002-10-15 2007-03-13 Celgene Corporation Methods of using 3-(4-amino-oxo-1,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)-piperidine-2,6-dione for the treatment and management of myelodysplastic syndromes
ES2542328T3 (en) 2002-12-06 2015-08-04 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for the identification, evaluation and treatment of patients with proteasome inhibition therapy
TW200418791A (en) 2003-01-23 2004-10-01 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Pharmaceutical compositions for inhibiting proteasome
PE20131352A1 (en) 2003-04-08 2013-11-14 Novartis Ag PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING AN S1P RECEPTOR AGONIST AND A SUGAR ALCOHOL
DE602004032340D1 (en) 2003-06-10 2011-06-01 J David Gladstone Inst San Francisco METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF LENTIVIRUS INFECTIONS
US7012063B2 (en) 2003-06-13 2006-03-14 Children's Medical Center Corporation Reducing axon degeneration with proteasome inhibitors
KR20070007075A (en) 2003-12-31 2007-01-12 사이덱스 인크 Inhalant formulation containing sulfoalkyl ether cyclodextrin and corticosteroid
GB0400804D0 (en) 2004-01-14 2004-02-18 Innoscience Technology Bv Pharmaceutical compositions
US8198270B2 (en) * 2004-04-15 2012-06-12 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for proteasome enzyme inhibition
US7232818B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2007-06-19 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US20050256324A1 (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Proteolix, Inc. Synthesis of amino acid keto-epoxides
US20060088471A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-27 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
PT2261236E (en) * 2004-12-07 2015-10-30 Onyx Therapeutics Inc Composition for proteasome inhibition
US7468383B2 (en) 2005-02-11 2008-12-23 Cephalon, Inc. Proteasome inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2006113470A2 (en) 2005-04-15 2006-10-26 Geron Corporation Cancer treatment by combined inhibition of proteasome and telomerase activities
GT200600350A (en) 2005-08-09 2007-03-28 LIQUID FORMULATIONS
AR057227A1 (en) 2005-12-09 2007-11-21 Centocor Inc METHOD FOR USING IL6 ANTAGONISTS WITH PROTEASOME INHIBITORS
US20070207950A1 (en) 2005-12-21 2007-09-06 Duke University Methods and compositions for regulating HDAC6 activity
WO2007122686A1 (en) 2006-04-14 2007-11-01 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Benzimidazole compounds
DE102006026464A1 (en) * 2006-06-01 2007-12-06 Virologik Gmbh Innovationszentrum Medizintechnik Und Pharma Pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of viral infections and / or tumors by inhibiting protein folding and protein degradation
AU2007261345B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2012-02-23 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition
WO2008033807A2 (en) 2006-09-13 2008-03-20 The Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona Synergistic combinations of antineoplastic thiol-binding mitochondrial oxidants and antineoplastic proteasome inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
EP2117556A2 (en) 2007-01-23 2009-11-18 Gloucester Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combination therapy comprising romidepsin and i.a. bortezomib
JP4325683B2 (en) 2007-02-14 2009-09-02 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Image display device and method for controlling image display device
WO2008140782A2 (en) 2007-05-10 2008-11-20 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
KR20150010802A (en) 2007-08-06 2015-01-28 밀레니엄 파머슈티컬스 인코퍼레이티드 Proteasome inhibitors
US7442830B1 (en) 2007-08-06 2008-10-28 Millenium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Proteasome inhibitors
KR20170125413A (en) 2007-10-04 2017-11-14 오닉스 세라퓨틱스, 인크. Crystalline peptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors and the synthesis of amino acid keto-epoxides
US7838673B2 (en) 2007-10-16 2010-11-23 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Proteasome inhibitors
JP5600595B2 (en) 2007-10-16 2014-10-01 ミレニアム ファーマシューティカルズ， インコーポレイテッド Proteasome inhibitor
WO2009067453A1 (en) 2007-11-19 2009-05-28 Syndax Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combinations of hdac inhibitors and proteasome inhibitors
GEP20135847B (en) 2008-06-17 2013-06-10 Millennium Pharm Inc Boronate ester compounds and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
AR075090A1 (en) 2008-09-29 2011-03-09 Millennium Pharm Inc ACID DERIVATIVES 1-AMINO-2-CYCLLOBUTILETILBORONICO PROTEOSOMA INHIBITORS, USEFUL AS ANTI-BANKER AGENTS, AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS THAT UNDERSTAND THEM.
CA2741312C (en) 2008-10-21 2020-10-27 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
TWI504598B (en) 2009-03-20 2015-10-21 Onyx Therapeutics Inc Crystalline tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
CN101928329B (en) 2009-06-19 2013-07-17 北京大学 Tripeptide boric acid (ester) compound and preparation method and application thereof
JP5919196B2 (en) 2009-11-13 2016-05-18 オニキス セラピューティクス， インク．Ｏｎｙｘ Ｔｈｅｒａｐｅｕｔｉｃｓ， Ｉｎｃ． Use of peptide epoxy ketones for metastasis inhibition
SG183843A1 (en) 2010-03-01 2012-10-30 Onyx Therapeutics Inc Compounds for immunoproteasome inhibition
EA029521B1 (en) 2010-03-31 2018-04-30 Милленниум Фармасьютикалз, Инк. Derivatives of 1-amino-2-cyclopropylethylboronic acid
MX2012011604A (en) 2010-04-07 2013-02-27 Onyx Therapeutics Inc Crystalline peptide epoxyketone immunoproteasome inhibitor.

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1994015956A1 (en) 1993-01-04 1994-07-21 The Wellcome Foundation Limited Endothelin converting enzyme inhibitors
WO1998010779A1 (en) 1996-09-13 1998-03-19 New York University Method for treating parasitic diseases with proteasome inhibitors
WO2005105827A2 (en) 2004-04-15 2005-11-10 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for proteasome enzyme inhibition
WO2005111008A2 (en) 2004-05-10 2005-11-24 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
WO2006099261A2 (en) 2005-03-11 2006-09-21 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Potent and specific immunoproteasome inhibitors
WO2007056464A1 (en) 2005-11-09 2007-05-18 Proteolix, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition

Non-Patent Citations (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
BERGE ET AL.: "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. PHARM. SCI., vol. 66, 1977, pages 1 - 19
CASCIO ET AL., EMBO J, vol. 20, 2001, pages 2357 - 2366
DIAZ-HEMANDEZ ET AL., J NEUROSCI, vol. 23, 2003, pages 11653 - 1161
DIAZ-HERNANDEZ ET AL., J NEUROSCI, vol. 23, 2003, pages 11653 - 1161
EGERER, ARTHRITIS RHEUM, vol. 54, 2006, pages 1501 - 8
ELOFSSON ET AL., CHEMISTRY AND BIOLOGY, CURRENT BIOLOGY, vol. 6, 1999, pages 811 - 822
GAN ET AL., J. BIOL. CHEM., vol. 279, 2004, pages 5565 - 5572
GARRETT, I. R. ET AL., J. CLIN. INVEST., vol. 111, 2003, pages 1771 - 1782
GONZALES ET AL., ARCH. MED. RES., vol. 28, no. 139-14, 1997
MENG ET AL., PNAS, vol. 96, 1999, pages 10403 - 10408
MISHTO ET AL., NEUROBIOL AGING, vol. 27, 2006, pages 54 - 66
STEIN ET AL., BIOCHEM., vol. 35, 1996, pages 3899 - 3908
SZALAY ET AL., AM J PATHOL, vol. 168, 2006, pages 1542 - 52
TERATO ET AL., J IMMUNOL, vol. 148, 1992, pages 2103 - 2108
YU, LAI, J VIROL, vol. 79, pages 644

Cited By (61)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8207297B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-06-26 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8324174B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-12-04 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8207125B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-06-26 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8129346B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-03-06 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8207126B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-06-26 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8198270B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-06-12 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for proteasome enzyme inhibition
US8207127B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-06-26 Onyx Technologies, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8207124B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-06-26 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8088741B2 (en) 2004-05-10 2012-01-03 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US10150794B2 (en) 2005-11-09 2018-12-11 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8080545B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2011-12-20 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US9657058B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2017-05-23 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8357683B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2013-01-22 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8080576B2 (en) 2006-06-19 2011-12-20 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for enzyme inhibition
US8367617B2 (en) 2007-10-04 2013-02-05 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline peptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors and the synthesis of amino acid keto-epoxides
EA024364B1 (en) * 2008-10-21 2016-09-30 Оникс Терапьютикс, Инк. Method for treating multiple myeloma
USRE47954E1 (en) 2008-10-21 2020-04-21 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
JP2012506445A (en) * 2008-10-21 2012-03-15 オニキス セラピューティクス， インク． Combination therapy using peptide epoxyketone
US9511109B2 (en) 2008-10-21 2016-12-06 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
WO2010048298A1 (en) * 2008-10-21 2010-04-29 Proteolix, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
AU2013204260B2 (en) * 2008-10-21 2016-09-01 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
AU2009308516B2 (en) * 2008-10-21 2016-08-25 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
US10596222B2 (en) 2008-10-21 2020-03-24 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy with peptide epoxyketones
US9051353B2 (en) 2009-03-20 2015-06-09 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US9403868B2 (en) 2009-03-20 2016-08-02 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
WO2011060179A1 (en) * 2009-11-13 2011-05-19 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc Use of peptide epoxyketones for metastasis suppression
EP2555621A4 (en) * 2010-04-07 2014-07-02 Onyx Therapeutics Inc Crystalline peptide epoxyketone immunoproteasome inhibitor
EP2555621A2 (en) * 2010-04-07 2013-02-13 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline peptide epoxyketone immunoproteasome inhibitor
WO2013010018A2 (en) * 2011-07-13 2013-01-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions and methods for inhibiting proteases
US9409944B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2016-08-09 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions and methods for inhibiting proteases
US20140248333A1 (en) * 2011-07-13 2014-09-04 Josephine Ford Cancer Center Compositions and methods for inhibiting proteases
WO2013010018A3 (en) * 2011-07-13 2013-05-10 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions and methods for inhibiting proteases
US9878047B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2018-01-30 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs of peptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US10682419B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2020-06-16 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs of peptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US10647744B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-05-12 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US11078233B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2021-08-03 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
EA029548B1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2018-04-30 Оникс Терапьютикс, Инк. Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US9657057B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-05-23 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Dipeptide and tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
AU2019203282B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2021-02-18 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Dipeptide and tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
EP2970225B1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2018-08-15 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Dipeptide and tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
EA030957B1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2018-10-31 Оникс Терапьютикс, Инк. Dipeptide and tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US9434761B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-09-06 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
AU2014240122B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2019-02-14 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Dipeptide and tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
WO2014152127A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Dipeptide and tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
USRE47302E1 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-03-19 Onyx Therapeutics Inc. Peptide epoxyketone immunoproteasome inhibitors
WO2014152134A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
TWI662047B (en) * 2013-03-14 2019-06-11 歐尼克斯治療公司 Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
US20140336106A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-11-13 Onyx Therapeutics, Inc. Tripeptide epoxy ketone protease inhibitors
USRE49816E1 (en) 2014-01-10 2024-01-30 Cornell University Dipeptides as inhibitors of human immunoproteasomes
WO2016004917A1 (en) 2014-07-10 2016-01-14 Immunologik Gmbh Substances for the treatment of retroviral infectious diseases
US11202817B2 (en) 2014-08-18 2021-12-21 Cornell University Dipeptidomimetics as inhibitors of human immunoproteasomes
US12016896B2 (en) 2014-08-18 2024-06-25 Cornell University Dipeptidomimetics as inhibitors of human immunoproteasomes
US11629141B2 (en) 2015-10-15 2023-04-18 Cornell University Proteasome inhibitors and uses thereof
US11066397B2 (en) 2015-10-15 2021-07-20 Cornell University Proteasome inhibitors and uses thereof
EP4006012A1 (en) * 2015-10-15 2022-06-01 Cornell University Proteasome inhibitors and uses thereof
EP3362754A4 (en) * 2015-10-15 2019-04-24 Cornell University Proteasome inhibitors and uses thereof
EP3330260A1 (en) 2016-12-01 2018-06-06 Enantia, S.L. Process for the preparation of an intermediate for the synthesis of i.a. carfilzomib
WO2018100050A1 (en) 2016-12-01 2018-06-07 Enantia, S.L. Process for the preparation of an intermediate for the synthesis of carfilzomib
WO2019040680A1 (en) 2017-08-23 2019-02-28 Krzar Life Sciences Immunoproteasome inhibitors and immunosuppressive agent in the treatment of autoimmune disorders
US11203613B2 (en) 2017-10-11 2021-12-21 Cornell University Peptidomimetic proteasome inhibitors
US11732005B2 (en) 2017-10-11 2023-08-22 Cornell University Peptidomimetic proteasome inhibitors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US8080545B2 (en) 2011-12-20
CO6241190A2 (en) 2011-01-20
US8431571B2 (en) 2013-04-30
BRPI0713309A2 (en) 2012-04-17
US20130035297A1 (en) 2013-02-07
AU2007261345A1 (en) 2007-12-27
US20140100169A1 (en) 2014-04-10
WO2007149512A3 (en) 2008-02-21
US20070293465A1 (en) 2007-12-20
IL196064A (en) 2015-10-29
CA2657213C (en) 2017-01-03
US20140080753A1 (en) 2014-03-20
IL196064A0 (en) 2009-09-01
AU2007261345B2 (en) 2012-02-23
CN101506224B (en) 2016-03-30
US8357683B2 (en) 2013-01-22
MX2008016512A (en) 2009-02-26
US20130338057A1 (en) 2013-12-19
US8765745B2 (en) 2014-07-01
NZ573759A (en) 2012-03-30
CN101506224A (en) 2009-08-12
US20100144648A1 (en) 2010-06-10
KR101441703B1 (en) 2014-09-17
PT2041158E (en) 2013-07-17
NZ613252A (en) 2015-01-30
EP2484688A1 (en) 2012-08-08
RU2009101319A (en) 2010-07-27
CY1114518T1 (en) 2016-10-05
JP5226679B2 (en) 2013-07-03
US20120088762A1 (en) 2012-04-12
DK2041158T3 (en) 2013-06-24
EP2041158A2 (en) 2009-04-01
JP2013067623A (en) 2013-04-18
PH12012501747A1 (en) 2015-10-12
US20130053303A1 (en) 2013-02-28
US8080576B2 (en) 2011-12-20
KR20090023477A (en) 2009-03-04
HK1128702A1 (en) 2009-11-06
MY147832A (en) 2013-01-31
US20130041008A1 (en) 2013-02-14
MY183014A (en) 2021-02-05
SI2041158T1 (en) 2013-09-30
EP2484688B1 (en) 2016-06-08
JP2009541327A (en) 2009-11-26
ZA200810765B (en) 2010-05-26
US9657058B2 (en) 2017-05-23
ZA201001834B (en) 2011-11-30
NZ597545A (en) 2013-07-26
EP2041158B1 (en) 2013-04-17
NZ603303A (en) 2014-05-30
UA101303C2 (en) 2013-03-25
RU2012103671A (en) 2013-08-10
US8609654B1 (en) 2013-12-17
CA2657213A1 (en) 2007-12-27
US20150353601A1 (en) 2015-12-10
RU2450016C2 (en) 2012-05-10
JP5740383B2 (en) 2015-06-24
IL218033A (en) 2015-07-30
PL2041158T3 (en) 2013-08-30
ES2415632T3 (en) 2013-07-26
US7691852B2 (en) 2010-04-06
US20100144649A1 (en) 2010-06-10
IL218033A0 (en) 2012-03-29
US8735441B2 (en) 2014-05-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9657058B2 (en) Compounds for enzyme inhibition
EP2542238B1 (en) Compounds for immunoproteasome inhibition
EP1758921A2 (en) Compounds for proteasome enzyme inhibition
AU2012200797B2 (en) Peptide epoxyketones for proteasome inhibition

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200780030610.4

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 07809745

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2657213

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 196064

Country of ref document: IL

Ref document number: 2009516564

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 573759

Country of ref document: NZ

Ref document number: 12008502844

Country of ref document: PH

Ref document number: 2007261345

Country of ref document: AU

Ref document number: 08135292A

Country of ref document: CO

Ref document number: 08135292

Country of ref document: CO

Ref document number: 13052825

Country of ref document: CO

Ref document number: 10509/DELNP/2008

Country of ref document: IN

Ref document number: MX/A/2008/016512

Country of ref document: MX

Ref document number: 2007809745

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008122048

Country of ref document: EG

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020097000551

Country of ref document: KR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2009101319

Country of ref document: RU

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: A20090056

Country of ref document: BY

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2007261345

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20070619

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 218033

Country of ref document: IL

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0713309

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20081219